JP2020073173A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a game interest in a Pachinko game machine.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine 1, there are provided: a first non-electric accessory 415b leading game balls to a first start area; a second non-electric accessory 415c leading game balls to a second start area more advantageous than the first start area; and game state control means which switches a game state after a jackpot game state is over either to a normal game state, to a first time-shortening game state, or to a second time-shortening game state in accordance with a stop display mode of a special symbol display device 431. In the second time-shortening game state, the second non-electric accessory 415c is likely to open; in the first time-shortening game state, the first non-electric accessory 415b is likely to open. When jackpot occurs in the first time-shortening game state, probability by which to move to the second time-shortening game state is made to be higher than when jackpot occurs in the normal game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

  For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes an opening / closing area to allow a game ball to enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by a player operating a launching device, and the game ball enters a start opening provided in the game area. When the ball is played, random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, and the stop display is performed. The person is notified.

JP, 2013-233375, A

  Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a winning start prize, so most players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win a winning start. However, with regard to the action of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening, the attention frequency is low because the action frequency is low, and even the action of the attacker may not be noticed. Especially, in the time saving game state, since the time from the starting mouth winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the action of the attacker, and as a result, not paid attention. Often.

  Therefore, the player hits the game ball in the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time saving game, confirms the start winning while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and informs that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of times saved will be digested intently with the expectation that a performance will occur or that all identification information will be a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a special interest to the player in the time saving game state.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
A first variable winning device (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) provided with a first displacement member (for example, a blade member 510) capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which winning is difficult and a second state in which winning is easy. )When,
A second variable winning device (for example, a second non-electric accessory) in which a game ball is provided with a second displacement member (for example, a Haiki member 512) that can be converted into a first state where it is difficult to win and a second state where it is easy to win. 415c),
A first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) provided in the first variable winning device,
A second starting area (for example, a second starting opening 414c) provided in the second variable winning device,
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
First variable display game control means capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a first special symbol game) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting area,
Second variable display game control means capable of executing a second variable display game (for example, a second special symbol game) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second starting area,
An effect control unit (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls an effect execution unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 50) that executes an effect,
In a gaming machine provided with a detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 450) for detecting an operation of a player,
The game state control means,
Normal gaming state,
A first specific game state (for example, a first short time game state) in which the first displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than in the normal game state,
It is possible to control to any one of a normal game state and a second specific game state in which the second displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than the first specific game state (for example, a second short time gaming state),
The effect control means is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the second displacement member is in the second state (for example, "continue right-handing" or "resume right-handing" in the navigation display 56). Equipped with means,
The suggestive effect execution means,
The suggestion effect can be executed in the first specific game state or the second specific game state,
When executing the suggestion effect in the second specific game state, the suggestion effect is not executed in the suggestion effect execution state (for example, the state where the navigation display 56 is “continue right-handed”). The suggestive effect can be executed by switching to any state of the suggestive effect non-execution state (for example, the state in which the navigation display 56 is “fired off”),
In the suggestion effect non-execution state, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that prompts an operation to the detection means (for example, character information "Hold your right hand!" On the touch sensor guide display 57), while It is characterized in that the operation promotion effect is not executed in the effect execution state.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the gaming machine, a third displacing member (for example, an opening / closing winning port 420) capable of converting the gaming ball into a first state in which winning is difficult and a second state in which winning is easy is provided. 3 variable winning devices (for example, V winning device 422),
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening 424 or a V winning ball sensor 119) provided in the third variable winning device,
When the first variable display game or the second variable display game has a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state),
When the second variable display game has a predetermined result, by setting the third displacement member in the second state, a predetermined game state in which a game ball can be easily won in the specific area (for example, a predetermined game state) , Small hit game state) can be generated,
The specific area can generate the special game state based on the passage of a game ball,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state,
The special game state generated based on the passage to the specific area is shifted to the second special game state rather than the special game state generated based on the first variable display game having the special result. High proportion,
It is characterized by
Further, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 40) having a gaming area in which a game medium can roll, and a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area which are different from each other in the gaming area. A launching means (eg a launching device) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium so as to hit the game medium (eg, a game ball) to the left-handed area. 20), a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. A region (for example, the second starting port 414c) and a special game value that can be given to the player by using either the passage of the game medium in the first starting region or the passage of the game medium in the second starting region as a trigger. Gaming state (eg jackpot) Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, steps S323 and S329 of FIG. 36) for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to the technique state and the small hitting game state, and the lottery of the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) that notifies the result by fluctuation and stop of the identification information, and a game state control means (for example, a main state) that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13), and it is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, which is arranged in the first start area. A first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting region when the game medium is captured in the first state. When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium can be switched between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be captured. The second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting area is linked to the passage of the game medium to switch the first displacement member to the first state. , A first actuating mechanism (for example, a first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from the first state to the second state by the first displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media, and in conjunction with the passage of the game media, A second operating mechanism (for example, a second operating mechanism 513) that switches the second displacing member to the first state and switches the first displacing state to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media. ) And a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) which is arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a game medium which is arranged in the first area and has passed the passage area can be easily captured. The game medium passes through the third displacement member (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched between the first state and the second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium, and the passage area. With this as a trigger, drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, and Driving means for switching the third displacement member to the first state (for example, a normal electric accessory solenoid 111), a first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuation mechanism, and the second passage. Actuator And a distribution device (for example, a distribution device 506) that distributes to one of the second passages, and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the special game state to the third displacement member. The first specific state (for example, the first short time gaming state) in which the distribution means is highly likely to guide the game medium captured when the game medium is switched to the first state to the first passage, and the third displacement. The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the member is switched to the first state to the first passage is lower than that in the first specific state and the possibility to guide the game medium to the second passage is high. A second specific state (for example, a second short time gaming state) and a probability that the drive determining means determines that the third displacing member is switched to the first state is lower than the first specific state and the second specific state. State (for example, regular game card ), And a game state setting means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S214 to step S219 of FIG. 24) that is set to any of the above, and is executed with the passage of the game medium in the first starting area of the second area as a trigger. Probability of transitioning to the normal state in the game state after the end of the special game state, and in the game state after the end of the special game state, which is executed by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area of the first area Is the same, the game state after the end of the special game state that was executed triggered by the passage of the game medium of the first starting region of the second region, and the passage of the game medium of the first starting region of the first region The probability of shifting to the second specific state in the game state after the end of the special game state executed as is higher when the game medium passing through the first starting region of the first region is used as a trigger. (Table in FIG. 54).

  According to the above configuration, the special game in the first specific state (for example, the first short time gaming state) in which the first displacement member (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b) is likely to be in the first state (for example, the open state). In the case of shifting to the state, the second displacing member (eg, the second non-moving member) in the first specific state after the special gaming state is finished, as compared with the case of shifting to the special gaming state in the normal state (eg, normal gaming state) The electric accessory 415c) has a high possibility of shifting to the second specific state (for example, the second short time gaming state) that tends to be in the first state (for example, the open state), and thus the first specific state (for example, the first state). It becomes possible to improve the interest in the time saving game state). As described above, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 50) for performing various productions and the production means are controlled to end the special game state during the special game state. Further provided is an effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201, steps S1071 to S1076 of FIG. 55) that performs an informing effect informing the subsequent game state, and the informing effect shifts to the normal state as an effect result. It is characterized in that there are three patterns of an effect for notifying the user, an effect for notifying the shift to the first specific state, and an effect for notifying the shift to the second specific state.

  According to the above configuration, before the end of the special game state, the game state after the end of the special game state is the normal state (normal game state), the first specific state (first short time gaming state) and the first specific state (second). Since it is informed which of the time saving game states), it becomes possible to give the player an interest in the effect during the special game.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, which has been shifted by the passage of the game medium in the second starting area, to the normal state and the second state. The probability of shifting to the normal state after the special game state, which is set to any one of the two specific states and triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting area, is triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area. It is the same as the probability of shifting to the normal state after the end of the special gaming state, and the probability of shifting to the second specific state when the special gaming state is triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting area is It is higher than the probability of shifting to the second specific state after the end of the special game state triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area in the normal state or the first specific state (special figure 1 in FIG. 54 (non-time saving, Time saving Or time reduction 2) and special symbol 2 (non-time reduction, characterized 15R time reduction 2) in time-shortening 1 or time reduction 2).

  According to the above configuration, when the special game state is transitioned to in the second specific state (second short time gaming state), the probability of becoming the second specific state (second short time gaming state) again after the special game state ends is normal game. Since it is higher than in the state or in the first short time gaming state when shifting to the special gaming state, the second specific state (second short time gaming state) and the special gaming state are easily repeated. Thus, the second specific state (second short time gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state (first short time gaming state).

  According to the present invention, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

It is a perspective view showing an appearance in a pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing an appearance in a pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic structure in a pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing an outline of game board 40 in a pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of the photo sensor 508 (509) in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the specification in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the normal electric auditors's figures 415a and the distribution apparatus 506 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the normal electric auditors's figures 415a and the distribution apparatus 506 in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit in a pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game in the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the specification in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive pattern of the normal electric auditors role 415a and the distribution apparatus 506 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the effect screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the effect screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the specification in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the specification in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the control processing performed in the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | generation screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | generation screen in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the specification in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the specification in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit opening pattern and the attacker opening pattern in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board in the modification of the pachinko game machine of one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
An overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an overview of a pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is a front view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 40 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a glass door 10, a launching device 20, a base door 30, a game board 40, a wooden frame 60, a liquid crystal display device 50 for displaying an image, a payout unit 70, and a substrate. It is composed of a unit 80 and the like.

  The glass door 10 is pivotally attached to the base door 30 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 11 is formed in the center of the glass door 10, and a protective glass 12 having transparency is arranged in the opening 11. The protective glass 12 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the game board 40 with the glass door 10 closed.

  Further, the glass door 10 is provided with a dish unit 13, a speaker 14, and an effect button 16 below the opening 11. The plate unit 13 is a unit body in which an upper plate 131 and a lower plate 132 positioned below the upper plate 131 are integrated. The upper plate 131 and the lower plate 132 are formed with payout openings for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls). When predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged. And, in particular, in the upper plate 131, game balls for firing in a game area 41 described later are stored. The speaker 14 is arranged inside the lower plate 132. The effect button 16 is arranged on the edge of the upper plate 131.

  The launching device 20 is disposed in the lower right part of the base door 30. The launching device 20 includes a launching handle 21 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 22 that fits in the lower right portion of the dish unit 13. The firing handle 21 is rotatable and is provided on the front side of the panel body 22. The panel body 22 is integrated with the lower right part of the dish unit 13 when the dish unit 13 and the launching device 20 are arranged on the base door 30. Then, the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the firing handle 21 by the player.

  A firing solenoid (not shown) for firing a game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 22. Further, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the periphery of the firing handle 21. Inside the firing handle 21, a firing volume that changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 21 and changes the electric power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown) is provided.

  When a touch sensor (not shown) is touched by the player, it is detected that the player grips the firing handle 21. When the firing handle 21 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle, and the resistance value at this time Corresponding power is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 131 are sequentially shot to a game area 41, which will be described later, of the game board 40, and the game is advanced. When a firing stop button (not shown) is pressed, the firing of the game ball is stopped even when the firing handle 21 is held and rotated.

  The base door 30 is attached to the wooden frame 60 so as to be openable and closable. On the base door 30, a game board 40 is arranged behind the protective glass 12.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 40 is made of a plate-shaped resin, and is made of various materials such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin. In addition, the game board 40, on the front side thereof, a game area 41 in which the shot game balls can roll down, an outlet 42 arranged at the bottom of the game area 41, and an outside of the game area 41. The LED unit 43 is disposed on the lower right side.

  The game board 40 is provided with an arc-shaped guide rail 411 that defines a game area 41, and a plurality of game nails 412 are driven into the game area 41. Further, in the game area 40, in the game area 41, the central base plate 413, the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, the second starting port 414c, the winning unit 415, the ball passing detector 416, the shutter 417, the big winning. Game members such as the mouth 418, the general winning openings 419a, 419b, 419c, the V winning device 422, and the touch sensor 450 are arranged.

  The guide rail 411 includes an outer rail 411a and an inner rail 411b arranged inside the outer rail 411a.

  The central base plate 413 is a frame-shaped member made of a resin material, and is arranged in an opening formed in the central portion of the game board 40. The center bed plate 413 includes a right rail portion 413a, a left rail portion 413b, a passage opening 413c, a stage 413d, and a right guide portion 413e. The right rail portion 413a and the left rail portion 413b are formed on the upper part of the center base plate 413 and guide the game balls shot on the board surface of the game board 40. The game ball beyond the uppermost part of the game area 41 flows down to the right side area of the game area 41 while drawing an arcuate trajectory by the guide of the right rail portion 413a. The game ball that has not exceeded the uppermost part of the game area 41 moves to the left side area of the game area 41 by the guide of the left rail portion 413b. Here, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 (see FIG. 3) is arranged within the frame of the central base plate 413 when the game board 40 is viewed from the front.

  Further, the passage port 413c is a portion formed on a predetermined portion on the left side of the central base plate 413 and through which a game ball can pass. The stage 413d is formed in the lower part of the center base plate 413 and extends to the opening side of the game board 40.

  The game ball that has passed through the passage opening 413c from the left side of the central base plate 413 rolls on the stage 413d of the game board 40 and flows down from the stage 413d to the board surface of the game board 40.

  The right guide portion 413e is formed on the right side of the center base plate 413, and is formed by a pair of guide plates that flow down downward while guiding both sides of the game ball. The game ball that has passed through the right rail portion 413a flows down in the right area of the game area 41 while being guided by the right guide portion 413e.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 20 (see FIG. 1, etc.) is guided by the guide rail 411 and moves to the upper part of the game area 41, and progresses due to the collision with the game nail 412, the central base plate 413, and the like. It flows down toward the lower side of the game area 41 while changing the direction. The player, for example, hits a game ball on the left side of the central base plate 413 and causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the central base plate 413 (so-called left hitting), and a launch handle 21 of the launching device 20 (FIG. 1, etc.). (See reference) is rotated to the right to drive the game ball to the right side of the center base plate 413, and passes through the right rail part 413a and the right guide part 413e to flow the game ball down the right side of the center base plate 413 ( So-called right-handed) can be selected to proceed with the pachinko game.

  The central starting port 414a is disposed below the center of the game area 41 below the central base plate 413. Here, a recess is formed in the center of the stage 413d, and the central starting port 414a is arranged immediately below this recess. That is, the game ball riding on the recessed portion in the center of the stage 413d becomes easy to enter the center starting port 414a. A winning area is provided in the central starting port 414a. A central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 10) is provided in this winning area.

  The first starting opening 414b and the second starting opening 414c are arranged in the lower right area of the game area 41. A winning area is provided in each of the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c. This winning area is provided with a first starting-port winning ball sensor 116b (see FIG. 10) and a second starting-port winning ball sensor 116c (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the game board 40 has various types so that the central starting opening 414a can be won only by left-handing, and the first starting opening 414b and the second starting mouth 414c can be won only by right-handing. Game members are arranged. As described above, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c are examples of the first starting region and the second starting region.

  The winning unit 415 is arranged in the lower right area of the game area 41. The prize winning unit 415 is a unit body that includes an ordinary electric accessory 415a, a first non-electric accessory 415b, a second non-electric accessory 415c, a cover plate 415d, etc., and these members are integrated. When the winning unit 415 is arranged on the game board 40, the normal electric role object 415a is arranged immediately below the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e, and further the second non-electric role object 415c and the first non-electric role. The objects 415b are sequentially arranged in the lower right portion of the game area 41.

  The ordinary electric accessory 415a has a flat plate member 520 (see FIG. 5) capable of projecting and retracting with respect to the plate surface of the game board 40, and a normal electric motor having an electrically driven solenoid core capable of projecting and retracting from the main body. The accessory solenoid 111 (see FIG. 10) is provided. The flat plate member 520 is indirectly connected to the solenoid iron core and slides in conjunction with the solenoid iron core. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is an example of the third displacement member.

  The first non-electric accessory 415b is a blade member 510 that is rotatably attached to the main body of the winning unit 415, and a first operation mechanism 511 that rotates the blade member 510 in conjunction with the movement of a game ball (see FIG. 5). ), And are provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the blade member 510 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction, the central portion thereof is rotatably supported, and rotates along the board surface of the game board 40. The first actuation mechanism 511 (see FIG. 5) is switched to an open state in which the game ball can easily ride on the inner surface of the blade member 510 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride the game ball on the inner surface of the blade member 510.

  The second non-electric accessory 415c is a blade member 512 that is rotatably attached to the main body of the winning unit 415, and a second operation mechanism 513 that rotates the blade member 512 in conjunction with the movement of the game ball (see FIG. 5). ), And are provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the blade member 512 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction, the central portion thereof is rotatably supported, and rotates along the board surface of the game board 40. The second actuating mechanism 513 (see FIG. 5) is switched to an open state where the game ball can easily ride on the inner surface of the blade member 512 and a closed state where it is difficult to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 512.

  The first non-electrical accessory 415b and the second non-electrical accessory 415c are generally accessories called mecha.

  When the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is projected and the game ball flowing down from above is caught by riding on the flat plate member 520, this game ball is formed in the passage opening formed in the game board 40 (for example, FIG. 61). Through the opening 40a) to move to the back side of the board. A normal electric accessory ball entering sensor 122 (see FIG. 10) is arranged in the vicinity of this passage opening. Although the details will be described later, the winning unit 415 has a configuration of distributing the game balls captured by the flat plate member 520 to either the first operating mechanism 511 (see FIG. 5) or the second operating mechanism 513 (see FIG. 5). is doing. Therefore, when the flat plate member 520 picks up the game ball, either the blade member 510 or the blade member 512 is opened.

  The cover plate 415d is a decorative member that covers the lower right area of the game area 41. The front of the normal electric accessory 415a, the first non-electric accessory 415b, the second non-electric accessory 415c, etc. is covered by a cover plate 415d. On the back surface of the cover plate 415d, a guide path 500 extending in a ridge is formed, and when the cover plate 415d is mounted on the game board 40, the guide path 500 is arranged below the ordinary electric accessory 415a. It

  The guide path 500 receives a game ball that has fallen from the side of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and extends obliquely so as to guide it between the center base plate 413 and the winning unit 415, and the lower end of this slope portion 501. Has a guide portion 502 toward the special winning opening 418. The guide portion 502 is formed in two steps, and holes are formed at the roots of the steps. Of these two holes, the hole on the downstream side functions as the first starting port 414b, and the hole on the upstream side functions as the first starting port 414b.

  The rotation axis of the blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged on the downstream side with respect to the first starting port 414b, and in the closed state, the tip end is upstream of the first starting port 414b in the guide path 500. The first starting port 414b of the blade member 510 is closed by the blade member 510 by coming into contact with or approaching the side. In the open state, the tip end portion of the blade member 510 is separated from the guide path 500 to open the first starting port 414b, and an arc-shaped slope facing the first starting port 414b is formed on the blade member 510. In this way, the blade member 510 becomes a state in which the game ball can easily ride by opening, and the game ball riding on the blade member 510 moves to the first starting opening 414b side. That is, by opening the blade member 510, the game ball easily enters the first starting opening 414b.

  Similarly, the rotation axis of the blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c is also arranged downstream of the second starting port 414c, and in the closed state, the tip end of the blade member 512 is located in the guide path 500. The second starting port 414c is closed by the blade member 512 by coming into contact with or approaching the upstream side of the second starting port 414c. In the open state, the distal end portion of the blade member 512 is separated from the guide path 500 to open the second starting port 414c, and the blade member 512 is formed with an arcuate slope facing the second starting port 414c. In this way, the blade member 512 becomes a state in which the game ball can easily ride by opening, and the game ball riding on the blade member 512 moves to the second starting port 414c side. That is, by opening the blade member 512, the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 414c.

  In this way, the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged in the first starting area (first starting opening 414b), and it is difficult to catch the game ball in the first state (open state) and the game ball is easily caught. It is an example of a first displacement member that can be switched to either of the second state (closed state) and guides the game ball to the first starting region when the game ball is captured in the first state. The second non-electric accessory 415c is arranged in the second starting area (second starting opening 414c), and the first state (open state) in which it is easy to capture a game ball and the second state (in which it is difficult to capture a game ball). It is an example of a second displacement member that can be switched to either the closed state) or that guides the game ball to the second starting area when the game ball is captured in the first state.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
Here, a configuration of a main part of the winning unit 415 will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning unit 415 further includes a first passage 504, a second passage 505, a distribution device 506, a first photo sensor 508, and a second photo sensor 509. The first passage 504 is a downwardly inclined passage that guides the game ball captured by the flat plate member 520 to the first actuation mechanism 511. The second passage 505 is a downwardly inclined passage that guides the game ball captured by the flat plate member 520 to the second operation mechanism 513. The upper ends of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and the upper ends of the ridges that partition the first passage 504 and the second passage 505 are the same as those of the first passage 504. It becomes a branch point with the two passages 505.

  The distribution device 506 distributes the game balls captured by the flat plate member 520 to either the first passage 504 or the second passage 505.

  The blade member 510 of the first non-electric accessory 415b is arranged on the board surface of the game board 40, and the first actuation mechanism 511 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40. The blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c is arranged on the board surface of the game board 40, and the second actuating mechanism 513 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40.

  The game ball on the blade member 510 is guided to the first starting port 414b, passes through the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b, and is sent to the first operating mechanism 511. The first actuation mechanism 511 rotates the blade member 510 when a predetermined number of game balls (two in the present embodiment) enter the first starting port 414b, and closes the first starting port 414b. To do.

  The game ball on the blade member 512 is guided to the second starting port 414c, passes through the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c, and is sent to the second operating mechanism 513. The second actuation mechanism 513 rotates the blade member 512 when the game ball enters the second starting port 414c to close the second starting port 414c. As described above, the blade member 510 of the first non-electrically-powered object 415b is an example of the first displacement member, and the blade member 512 of the second non-electrically-powered object 415c is an example of the second displacement member.

[Configuration and Operation of Main Parts of Distribution Device 506]
The distribution device 506 includes a rectangular distribution plate 507 and a distribution solenoid 121.
The distribution plate 507 has a rotating shaft on one side of the rectangle, and the rotating shaft is erected at a branch point between the first passage 504 and the second passage 505. As a result, the distribution plate 507 becomes rotatable, and by rotating the distribution plate 507, the first open state in which the first passage 504 is opened and the second passage 505 is closed, and the first passage 504 is opened. It becomes possible to switch to the second open state in which the second passage 505 is closed and the second passage 505 is opened.

  The distribution solenoid 121 is a drive source that rotates the distribution plate 507. By driving and controlling the distribution solenoid 121, it becomes possible to alternately switch between the first open state and the second open state.

  When the distribution device 506 is in the first open state, as shown in FIG. 5A, the game ball captured by the ordinary electric accessory 415a is sent from the first passage 504 to the first actuation mechanism 511. .. The first operating mechanism 511 rotates the blade member 510 in the opening direction when the game ball is sent.

  When the distribution device 506 is in the second open state, as shown in FIG. 5B, the game ball captured by the ordinary electric accessory 415a is sent from the second passage 505 to the second operating mechanism 513. .. The second actuation mechanism 513 rotates the blade member 512 in the closing direction when the game ball is sent. In this way, the distribution device 506 guides the game medium captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) to the first passage and the second operation mechanism that lead to the first operation mechanism (first operation mechanism 511). It is an example of distribution means for distributing to any of the second passages. The first actuation mechanism 511 switches the first displacement member (blade member 510) to the first state (open state) in conjunction with the passage of the game medium (game ball), and at the same time, the first displacement member (blade member 510). Is an example of a first operating mechanism that switches from the first state (open state) to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media. The second actuation mechanism 513 switches the second displacement member (blade member 512) to the first state (open state) in conjunction with the passage of the game medium (game ball), and also the second displacement member (blade member 512). Is an example of a second operating mechanism that switches from the first state (open state) to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media.

  Then, as described above, when the game balls are sent from the blade member 510 to the first operating mechanism 511 and from the blade member 512 to the second operating mechanism 513, the blade members 510 and 512 are closed. The first operating mechanism 511 and the second operating mechanism 513 are configured so that the blade members 510 and 512 are closed when a plurality of game balls (for example, two) are sent from the blade member 510 and the blade member 512. It may be configured. According to the above-described embodiment, the normal electric auditors role 415a, the second non-electrical auditors role 415c, and the first non-electrical auditors role 415b are arranged in this order from the upstream side, but these three roles are games. The order does not matter as long as it is arranged in the right area of the area 41.

[Arrangement of First Photo Sensor 508]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the first photosensor 508 and the second photosensor 509, and FIG. 6A shows the blade member 510 on which the first photosensor 508 (second photosensor 509) is arranged. (Blade member 512) is a front view, FIG. 6B is a side view of blade member 510 (blade member 512) on which first photosensor 508 (second photosensor 509) is arranged, and FIG. 5 is a front view showing a state in which a first photo sensor 508 (second photo sensor 509) detects rotation of a blade member 510 (blade member 512). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the first photosensor 508 includes a light emitting element 508a and a light receiving element 508b. The second photo sensor 509 includes a light emitting element 509a and a light receiving element 509b.

  The arrangement of the first photo sensor 508 will be described. In FIG. 6, the light emitting element 508a is arranged on the back surface of the cover plate 415d, the light receiving element 508b is arranged at a position facing the light emitting element 508a, and the blade member 510 rotates to cause the base end of the blade member 510 to rotate. The part passes between the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b.

  The light emitting element 508a emits light toward the light receiving element 508b, and the light receiving element 508b detects the light from the light emitting element 508a. In the closed state in which the tip of the blade member 510 is in contact with the guide path 500, the base end of the blade member 510 is positioned between the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b, so that the light from the light emitting element 508a emits light. The light is blocked by the base end of the member 510, and the light receiving element 508b does not receive light.

  In the present embodiment, the positions of the light emitting element 508a and the light receiving element 508b, and the shape of the base end portion of the blade member 510 functioning as a detection piece are such that the blade member 510 rotates as shown in FIG. 6C. When the gap between the tip portion of the blade member 510 and the guide path 500 becomes about half (radius) of the diameter of the game ball, the base end portion of the blade member 510 is removed from the optical path of the light emitting element 508a, and the light emitting element 508a. It is set so that the light from can reach the light receiving element 508b. That is, the first photo sensor 508 makes it possible to determine whether or not the gap between the tip portion of the blade member 510 and the guide path 500 is open at least half the diameter of the game ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similarly, in the second photo sensor 509, the positions of the light emitting element 509a and the light receiving element 509b and the shape of the base end portion of the blade member 512 that functions as a detection piece are such that the blade member 512 rotates. When the gap between the tip of the blade member 512 and the guide path 500 becomes about half (radius) of the diameter of the game ball, the base end of the blade member 510 comes off from the optical path of the light emitting element 509a, and the light emitting element. It is set so that the light from 509a can reach the light receiving element 509b. That is, the second photo sensor 509 makes it possible to determine whether or not the gap between the tip of the blade member 512 and the guide path 500 is more than half the diameter of the game ball.

  In FIG. 4, the ball passage detector 416 includes a passage gate through which game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 10) arranged in the gate member. The ball passage detector 416 is normally arranged directly above the electric accessory 415a, and the passage gate of the ball passage detector 416 is arranged opposite to the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e. That is, since the game ball that has shot the game ball to the right side area in the game area 41 passes through the right guide portion 413e and flows down toward the passage gate, it easily passes through the ball passage detector 416. Thus, the ball passage detector 416 is an example of a passage area through which the game medium can pass.

  The shutter 417 is arranged below the central starting port 414a. The shutter 417 is configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state. The special winning opening 418 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 417. The special winning opening 418 allows winning when the shutter 417 is in the open state, and cannot win when the shutter 417 is in the closed state. A special winning area is provided in the special winning opening 418, and the special winning area count sensor 113 (see FIG. 10) is provided in this winning area. Note that, in FIG. 4, the shutter 417 is disposed below the central starting port 414a, but as long as it is a position capable of capturing the game ball hit to the right, the position of the central starting port 414a is It can be set appropriately. For example, you may arrange | position in the area | region between the non-electrical accessory 415b and the non-electrical accessory 415c, or the slope part 501 of the guide path 500. In this way, the shutter 417 is an example of a fifth displacement member which is arranged near the second displacement member (non-electric accessory 415c) and which can be opened and closed in the first special game state (big hit game state).

  The general winning openings 419a, 419b, 419c are arranged in the area on the left side of the game area 41. The game balls that have entered the general winning openings 419a, 419b, 419c come to pass through a common path, and a general winning ball sensor 114a (see FIG. 10) is provided at a predetermined portion of this common path.

  The V winning device 422 is disposed on the lower right side inside the center base plate 413, and has an opening / closing winning opening 420, an attacker 421, a guide path 423, a V winning opening 424, a losing opening 425, and a movable member 426. And are equipped with.

  The opening / closing winning opening 420 is a passage opening formed on the lower right side of the central base plate 413 through which a game ball can pass, and an opening / closing winning hole count sensor installed near this passage opening and detecting the game ball passing through the passage opening. 120 (see FIG. 10). When the game balls pass through the opening / closing winning opening 420, a predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 71.

  The attacker 421 is a member that is formed along an arc shape, and is a member that opens and closes the opening / closing winning port 420 arranged on the lower right side of the center base plate 413. The base end of the attacker 421 is rotatably attached near the lower part of the opening / closing winning opening 420 on the central base plate 413. The attacker 421 is driven by the opening / closing winning opening solenoid 118 (see FIG. 10), and when the tip of the attacker 421 is in contact with or close to the upper side of the opening / closing winning opening 420 on the central base plate 413, the opening / closing winning opening is opened. The state of closing 420 is set. When the tip of the attacker 421 is inclined to the winning unit 415 side, the open / close winning port 420 is opened. As described above, the attacker 421 is an example of a fourth displacement member that can be switched between the first state (open state) where the game medium is easily captured and the second state (closed state) where the game medium is difficult to be captured. ..

  The guide path 423 is for guiding a game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 and has entered the inside of the central base plate 413. A rectangular opening through which the game ball can pass is formed in the center of the guide path 423. Oru.

  The V winning opening 424 is arranged immediately below the opening formed in the central portion of the guide path 423. Therefore, the game ball dropped from the opening of the guide path 423 enters the V winning opening 424. The V winning opening 424 is provided with a V winning ball sensor 119 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a game ball winning the V winning opening 424.

  The losing opening 425 is arranged at the downstream end of the guide path 423, and the game ball dropped from the lower end of the guiding path 423 enters the losing opening 425.

  The movable member 426 is a rectangular plate-shaped member arranged in an opening formed in the center of the guide path 423. The downstream end of the movable member 426 is rotatably supported by the guide path 423. The movable member 426 is driven by the V winning opening solenoid 117 (see FIG. 10) and rotates upward to open the V winning opening 424 immediately above and to rotate downward from the V winning enabling state. The guide path 423 and the movable member 426 are flush with each other, and it is possible to alternately switch to the V winning impossible state in which the portion directly above the V winning opening 424 is closed.

  Therefore, when the movable member 426 rotates upward and is in the V winning state when the game ball passes through the opening / closing winning port 420, the movement of the game ball is restricted by the movable member 426, and the game ball is moved. Falls and enters the V winning opening 424. When the movable member 426 is not rotated upward, the guide path 423 and the movable member 426 are flush with each other, so that the game ball enters the lose opening 425 and is collected on the back side of the game board 40. ..

  The entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 424 is called "V winning". Further, the big hit due to the game ball winning the V winning opening 424 is called "V big hit". It is limited that the game ball passes through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is in the open state, and it is impossible for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is in the closed state. That is, when the attacker 421 is in the open state, there is a possibility of winning the V prize, and when the attacker 421 is in the closed state, no V prize is won. In this way, the V winning opening 424 is arranged in the first area (the right side area of the game area 41), and the game medium captured by the fourth displacing member (attacker 421) passes therethrough, whereby the game state control means (main The CPU 101) is an example of a special winning area that serves as an opportunity to shift the game state to the first special game state (V big hit game state).

  Further, the attacker 421 is directed obliquely upward in the open state, and the tip end portion of the attacker 421 is close to the lower end portion of the slope portion 501 of the guide path 500. Therefore, while the attacker 421 is in the open state, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. Further, when the attacker 421 is in the closed state, the game ball passes between the central base plate 413 and the guide portion 502 in the guide path 500. Here, the second non-electrical accessory 415c is arranged in the vicinity of the downstream side of the attacker 421 in the downflow direction of the game ball, and when the second non-electrical accessory 415c is opened, the tip of the blade member 512. The part is close to the central base plate 413. In other words, when the attacker 421 is in the closed state and the second non-electrical accessory 415c is in the open state, the game ball that has passed the side of the attacker 421 enters the second non-electrical accessory 415c. As a result, even if the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened immediately before the special game state (big hit game state, V big hit game state, small hit game state), the attacker 421 immediately after the attacker 421 is closed. The game ball that passes the side enters the second non-electric accessory 415c. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the second non-electric accessory 415c opened immediately before the special game state to maintain the open state until the game after the special game state ends.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the attacker 421 is arranged on the upstream side of the second non-electrical accessory 415c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the attacker 421 is located on the downstream side of the second non-electrical accessory 415c. It may be arranged. As a result, the game ball preferentially moves toward the second non-electric accessory 415c during the opening of the second non-electric accessory 415c, and moves toward the attacker 421 after closing the second non-electric accessory 415c. As a result, the second non-electric accessory 415c opened immediately before the special game state can be surely prevented from being maintained in the open state until the game after the end of the special game state.

  The timing when the movable member 426 is opened is related to the timing when the attacker 421 is opened. For example, the attacker 421 and the movable member 426 are both normally closed. When the attacker 421 is in the open state, the movable member 426 may be in the open state at the same time or with a slight delay, and the movable member 426 may be in the closed state before the attacker 421 is in the closed state.

  The touch sensor 450 is a non-contact type touch sensor, and is arranged in a predetermined region in the right side of the game area 41, for example, in the vicinity of the right side of the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. The touch sensor 450 outputs a detection signal when the player faces the touch sensor 450 by holding his / her hand over the protective glass 12 (see FIG. 3) or touching the protective glass 12.

  The LED unit 43 is provided with a special symbol display device 431, a round number display device 432, a special symbol hold display device 433, a normal symbol display device 434, and a normal symbol hold display device 435.

  The special symbol display device 431 is configured by 7-segment LEDs, and the special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol) indicated by the 7-segment LEDs is repeatedly turned on and off after the predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. The display changes and is stopped. Specifically, the special symbol display device 431, the game ball is won in the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c, this gaming ball is the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 10). ), When detected by the first starting entrance winning ball sensor 116b and the second starting entrance winning ball sensor 116c (see FIG. 10), the special symbol is variably displayed, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the special symbol is displayed in a predetermined stop display mode. Stop display with. Thus, the special symbol is an example of identification information. The special symbol display device 431 is an example of identification information display means.

  The number-of-rounds display device 432 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot gaming state described later.

  In the present embodiment, 12 display lamps are arranged on the side of the round number display device 432. These display lamps constitute the special symbol hold display device 433, the normal symbol display device 434, and the normal symbol hold display device 435.

  The special symbol hold display device 433 is composed of four display lamps, and the number of executions of the variable display on the special symbol display device 431 is triggered by winning the central starting opening 414a or the first starting opening 414b (so-called, "Hold quantity", "Hold quantity regarding special symbol") is displayed by turning on, off or blinking.

  Specifically, the special symbol hold display device 433, for example, when the execution count of the variable display in the special symbol display device 431 is held for one time, one display lamp is turned on, and the special symbol display device 431. When the number of executions of the variable display in 2 is suspended for two times, the two display lamps are turned on. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol hold display device for holding the variable display in the special symbol display device 431 triggered by winning the second start opening 414c is not provided.

  The normal symbol display device 434 is composed of two display lamps, and the normal symbol shown by these display lamps is repeatedly turned on and off alternately after the predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. The display changes and is stopped. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 434, the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416, and when this game ball is detected by the ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 10), the normal symbol is variably displayed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode.

  The normal symbol hold display device 435 is composed of four display lamps, and when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416, the number of executions of variable display on the normal symbol display device 434 (so-called "hold" "Number of pieces", "holding number of ordinary symbols") is displayed by turning on, off or blinking. Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 435, for example, when the number of times of execution of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 434 is held for one time, one display lamp is turned on, and the normal symbol display device 434. When the number of executions of the variable display in 2 is suspended for two times, the two display lamps are turned on.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 50 is an example of display means and is arranged behind (on the back side of) the game board 40, and as shown in FIG. 4, its display area 51 is the center of the game board 40. It is arranged above. In the display area 51, various images such as a derived pattern, which is an identification pattern for performance, a performance image, a decoration image for decoration, are displayed. Although the liquid crystal display device 50 is described as an example of the display unit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. The display means may be a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT display, a lamp or the like.

  The payout unit 70 includes a payout device 71 (see FIG. 10) described later, and the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, the second starting port 414c, the general winning ports 419a to 419c, the large winning port shown in FIG. 418, when a game ball is won in the opening / closing prize hole 420, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132 in accordance with the type of each prize hole.

  The board unit 80 stores a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 10) and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 10) which will be described later, and controls the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Game status on pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, a game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming state in this embodiment includes a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and a time saving gaming state. In the normal game state, the shutter 417 and the attacker 421 are in a closed state, the game ball cannot be accepted in the big winning opening 418 and the opening / closing winning opening 420, and there is a winning opportunity to the first starting opening 414b or the second starting opening 414c. It is a little game state.

  The special gaming state is a gaming state in which the shutter 417 or the attacker 421 is opened and the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 418 or the opening / closing winning opening 420, and a predetermined game value can be given to the player. As the special gaming state, the shutter 417 is opened, and the jackpot gaming state and the V jackpot gaming state in which a lot of gaming value can be given to the player, and the attacker 421 are opened, and the gaming value can be given to the player. The small hit game state is included. Thus, the big hit game state and the V big hit game state correspond to the first special game state, and the small hit game state corresponds to the second special game state.

  In the time saving game state, the first non-electrical accessory 415b or the second non-electrical accessory 415c is easily opened, and the number of winning opportunities to the first starting opening 414b or the second starting opening 414c is increased, resulting in a special symbol. It is a gaming state in which the time for variable display is shortened. As the time saving game state, there are two game states of a first time saving game state and a second time saving game state. In the time saving game state, an opening pattern is set which is a combination of the drive pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a and the drive pattern of the distribution device 506. In particular, the opening pattern is set so that the first non-electric role object 415b has many opportunities to open in the first short time gaming state, and the second non-electric role object 415c has many opportunities to open in the second short time gaming state. The pattern is set.

  The opening pattern in the first short time gaming state is set from the first opening pattern group having a plurality of types of opening patterns in which the first non-electric accessory 415b has many opportunities to open, and the opening pattern in the second short time gaming state is , The second non-electric accessory 415c is opened from a first opening pattern group having a plurality of types of opening patterns that are frequently opened.

  Specifically, in the first opening pattern group, there is almost no possibility that the second non-electric accessory 415c will open (see the opening pattern A in FIG. 8) and the possibility that the second non-electric accessory 415c will open is extremely small. Pattern (see opening pattern B in FIG. 8), and the second pattern group includes a pattern (see opening pattern C in FIG. 9) in which the second non-electric accessory 415c almost certainly opens and a second non-electric combination. The object 415c has a pattern (see the opening pattern D in FIG. 9) that may not be opened. Which open pattern is set in the first short time gaming state or the second short time gaming state is determined by a random number lottery by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a is two patterns in each of the first short time gaming state and the second short time gaming state, but may be one pattern or more than two patterns. In short, the number of patterns is set as appropriate as long as the second non-electric auditors object 415c does not open in the first short time gaming state, and the second non-electric auditors object 415c opens in the second short time gaming state. It is possible.

  A player generally starts a game from a normal game state, and hits a game ball into a game area 41 of a game board 40 with a launching device 20. When the game ball that has been driven into wins in the central starting port 414a, the special symbol of the special symbol display device 431 and the identification symbol (derived symbol) for effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 are variably displayed. In addition, when the game ball enters the central starting port 414a during the variable display of the special symbol, the special ball based on the entering of the game ball into the central starting port 414a is displayed until the special symbol in the variable display is stopped. Execution (start) of variable display of symbols is suspended. After that, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special symbols that have been held is started.

  In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol due to the ball entering the central starting opening 414a and the first starting opening 414b is displayed. With respect to the number of reserves, the upper limit is four times in total when the ball enters the central starting port 414a and when the ball enters the first starting port 414b. Therefore, it is possible to hold a maximum of four times.

  The other (variable display start of a predetermined special symbol) condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started every time the variable display start condition of the predetermined special symbol is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display in the special symbol display device 431 triggered by winning the second starting opening 414c is not held, the special symbol stops when the second starting opening 414c is won. The special symbol display device 431 variably displays only in the displayed state.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 431 is in a specific stop display mode, the normal game state is shifted to the special game state. Of this particular stop display mode, the stop display mode for shifting to the big hit game state is the big hit, and the stop display mode for shifting to the small hit game state is the small hit. Further, the stop display mode of the special symbol other than the big hit or the small hit is a lost symbol, and when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal game state is maintained without shifting to the special game state. As described above, a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result is referred to as a "special symbol game".

  Here, the special symbol game is executed with the winning of the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b as a trigger, and the probability of shifting to a small hit is low (including the probability 0), the first special symbol game, and the second. The second special symbol game, which is executed with the winning of the start opening 414c as a trigger and has a high probability of shifting to a small hit, is provided. Although details will be described later, in the normal game state, the first special symbol game is executed, and in the time saving game state, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is executed. For the sake of convenience of the following description, the special symbol that is changed and stopped by the winning on the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b is referred to as a first special symbol or special symbol 1. In addition, the special symbol that is changed and stopped by the winning on the second starting opening 414c is referred to as a second special symbol or special symbol 2.

  Further, in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbol display device 431, a derived symbol composed of a number, which is an example of the identification symbol, is variably displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 except for a specific case. Further, the special symbol display device 431 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol is displayed, and the derived symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

  Further, in the special symbol display device 431, in the case where the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific stop display mode, an effect image that causes the player to know that it is a hit is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. It Specifically, in the special symbol display device 431, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a jackpot in which many exits can be obtained, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. The combination of the identification symbols for production displayed in is a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed in each of a plurality of symbol rows), and a performance image showing a big hit Is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

  Then, in the special symbol display device 431, when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode and the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the shutter 417 is driven so as to be in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. As a result, the special winning opening 418 is in an open state in which it is easy to receive a game ball.

  In the special symbol display device 431, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode, and when the game state is shifted to the small hit game state, the attacker 421 is driven for a short time to be in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. Then, the opening / closing winning port 420 is opened. The opening / closing winning opening 420 has an area (not shown) having the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120 (see FIG. 10), and a predetermined number (eg, 1) of game balls are won in the area or a predetermined time. The attacker 421 is driven to the open state until (for example, about 1.8 seconds) elapses. Then, when the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning port 420 wins the V winning port 424, it becomes a V big hit, and the small hit game state shifts to the V big hit game state. When the gaming state shifts to the V big hit gaming state, the shutter 417 is driven so as to be in an open state in which it is easy to receive a game ball. As a result, the special winning opening 418 is in an open state in which it is easy to receive a game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the shutter 417 is opened during the big hit game when the small hit is changed to the V big hit. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the attacker 421 is used after the second round. It may be a big hit game that opens. At that time, it is desirable that the number of prizes per round is about 10. In addition, it is desirable that the number of prize balls due to winning in the opening / closing winning port 420 be switched from 3 to 10 during the V big hit. Further, the shutter 417 and the attacker 421 are alternately opened and closed for each round so that, for example, when the attacker 421 is closed, a game ball that has passed near the attacker 421 is captured by the shutter 417, so that the player can play the big hit game. It is also possible to have as few spheres as possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, V winning can be performed in the small hitting game state, but V winning may be possible in the big hitting game state. For example, a two-round jackpot with a short opening time of the attacker 421 may be provided so that a V prize can be given during a game of the two-round jackpot, and the number of round games and the opening time may be increased in response to the V prize. ..

  The special winning opening 418 provided on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 417 has an area (not shown) having the special winning opening count sensor 113 (see FIG. 5), and a predetermined number of game balls ( The shutter 417 is driven to the open state until a prize is won or a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any of the conditions for winning a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 418 or elapse of a predetermined time in the open state is satisfied, the shutter 417 is driven, and the special winning opening 418 is closed so that it is difficult to receive the game balls. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game state or the V big hit game state, the big winning opening 418 is repeatedly moved 15 times from the closed state to the open state by driving the shutter 417, but the present invention is not limited to this. The open state in which the ball can be easily received may be set to any number such as once or twice.

  Moreover, when the specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 is a big hit, the game state shifts to the big hit game state among the special game states. In addition, when the player wins the V prize, the gaming state shifts to the V jackpot gaming state. Then, in the big hit game state, the game in which the special winning opening 418 is changed from the closed state to the open state is repeated 15 times is defined as one round, and a round game in which this round is repeated is executed. Such a round game is counted as the number of rounds such as "1" round and "2" round. For example, the first round game is also called the first round and the second round game is also called the second round. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 15, but the number of rounds is not limited to this, and the number of rounds can be set to any number. In the V big hit game state, the opening and closing of the first attacker 421 is treated as the first round, and the shutter 417 is opened for the second round. Then, by repeating the round game by opening and closing the shutter 417 14 times, a total of 15 round games are played.

  Also, when a game ball wins the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, the second starting port 414c, the general winning openings 419a to 419c, the large winning opening 418, and the opening / closing winning opening 420, each type of winning opening is selected. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132 by the payout unit 70.

  Further, when the game ball hit in the game area 41 by the player passes the ball passage detector 416, the display lamp of the normal symbol display device 434 variably displays. Further, when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 416 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display device 435 is switched until the normal symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of variable display of normal symbols based on passage of game balls to the ball passage detector 416 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended normal symbol is started. Then, in the case where the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 434 is a mode indicating a hit, the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a is in a state of protruding for a predetermined time. For the sake of convenience of the following description, the protrusion of the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a is referred to as the open state of the normal electric accessory 415a. Similarly, pulling in the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a is referred to as closing or in the closed state of the normal electric accessory 415a.

  As described above, a game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed and then stopped and the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 415a (see FIG. 4) varies depending on the result is called a “normal symbol game”.

  When the big hit game state or the V big hit game state ends, there is a case where the time shifts to display the special symbol is shortened and the time may shift to the short game state. In the time saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol game is set higher than the probability of hitting in the normal gaming state, and the chances that the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a protrudes increases. As a result, the number of opportunities for the game ball to ride on the flat plate member 520 increases, and the game ball on the flat plate member 520 rolls to open the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c. Increase.

[Basic specifications of pachinko machine 1]
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine.

  FIG. 7A shows an example of specifications of the special symbol game. In the first special symbol game, the big hit probability is 1/300, the small hit probability is 0/300, the number of holdings is 4, the central starting opening 414a, the first starting opening 414b, and the second starting opening 414c have 3 prize balls. The number of prizes of the general prize opening 419a to 419c is 10, the prize hole of the special winning opening 418 is 10, the prize ball of the opening / closing winning opening 420 is 3, and the upper limit of the count number of the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120 is 1. The upper limit of the number of pieces of the special winning opening count sensor 113 is set to 10.

  In the second special symbol game, the big hit probability is 1/300, the small hit probability is 299/300, the number of reserves is 4, the central starting opening 414a, the first starting opening 414b and the second starting opening 414c have 3 prize balls. Number of prize balls of the general prize hole 419a to 419c is 10, number of prize balls of the opening and closing prize hole 420 is 3, upper limit of the number of counts of the opening and closing prize hole count sensor 120 is 1, count number of the large prize hole count sensor 113. The upper limit of is set to 10. The special numbers 1 and 2 are divided up to the reserved number. It is common after that.

  In the first special symbol game, since the small hit probability is 0/300 and the small hit does not occur, no V prize is won. On the other hand, in the second special symbol game, since the probability of a small hit is extremely high, there is a possibility of shifting from the V prize to the V big hit game state. Thus, in the first special symbol game, the small hit probability is 0/300, and in the second special symbol game, the small hit probability is 299/300, which means that the second starting area (second starting opening) 414c) the probability of transitioning to the second special game state (small hit) upon the passage of the game medium to 414c) is the second special game upon the passage of the game medium to the first starting area (first starting opening 414b). This is an example of a higher probability of shifting to the state (small hit). Incidentally, the small hit probability of the first special symbol game is not 0, for example, 1/300 and the like, which is lower than that of the second special symbol game, and a small hit, a V winning and a V big hit from the first special symbol game. You may have sex.

  FIG. 7B shows an example of specifications of the normal symbol game. In the normal symbol game, there are cases of a normal game state (non-time saving state), a first time saving game state, and a second time saving game state.

  In the normal gaming state, the winning probability is set to 0 and the number of holdings is set to 4. In the first time saving game, the winning probability is set to 251/251, and the reserved number is set to 4. The number of shortening times is 100 times, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is set to the first pattern group. In the second shorter game, the winning probability is set to 251/251, and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of times of shortening is 100 times, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 415a is set to the second pattern group. Although the details of the first and second pattern groups will be described later, they are drive patterns of the ordinary electric auditors role 415a and the distribution device 506.

  FIG.7 (c) shows an example of a big hit distribution. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit and a V big hit by a special symbol game, the big hit is distributed to any one of 15 round normal big hit, 15 round short time 1 big hit, and 15 round time short 2 big hit. Here, the 15-round normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and which does not become a time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The 15-round short time 1 big hit is a big hit in which the number of round games is 15, and the first short time game state is entered after the big hit game state ends. The 15 round short time 2 big hit is a big hit in which the number of round games is 15, and the second short time game state is entered after the big hit game state ends.

  In the jackpot of the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds of regular jackpots is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours 1 jackpot is 0, and the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours 2 jackpots is 50. / 100.

  In the jackpot of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds of regular jackpots is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours 1 jackpot is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours 2 jackpots. Is 65/100. Specifically, in the big hit of the second special symbol game, there are 100 kinds of special symbols (big hit symbols) that are big hits. In these big hit symbols, 20 kinds of big hit symbols are 15 rounds of regular big hits and 15 kinds of big hits. Designs are distributed to 15 rounds and 1 big hit, 65 types of big hits are distributed to 15 rounds and 2 big hits.

  In the V big hit via the small win of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the normal gaming state is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to the first shorter working state is 15/100, and the second shorter working hour. The probability of being distributed to the game state is 65/100. Specifically, in the V big hit via the small hit of the second special symbol game, it is determined by a special symbol (small hit symbol) that is a small hit. There are 100 kinds of small hit symbols, and in these small hit symbols, 20 kinds of small hit symbols are in the normal game state, 15 kinds of small hit symbols are in the first hour short game state, and 65 kinds of small hit symbols are the second. It is allotted to a time saving game state.

  In this way, the distribution of the game state after the end of the big hit game state by the big hit of the second special symbol game and the distribution of the game state after the end of the V big hit game state via the small hit of the second special symbol game are the same. After the big hit game, the big hit and the V big hit triggered by the second special symbol game are moved to the normal game state, the first short time gaming state or the second short time gaming state with the same probability.

  Such distribution is performed after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state), the transition of which is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second start area (second start opening 414c). ), And the probability of being in the normal state (normal game state) after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the V jackpot game state) executed with the passage of the special winning area (passing the V winning opening 424), From the probability of becoming a normal state (normal game state) after the end of the first special game state (after the jackpot game state), the transition of which is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) when the game medium in the first starting area is passed After the end of the first special game state, which is small and the transition is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) with the passage of the game medium in the second start area (second start opening 414c) as a trigger. After the jackpot gaming state), and after the end of the first special gaming state (after the jackpot gaming state) executed with the passage of the special winning area (passing the V winning opening 424), the first specific state (first time saving game) The probability of being in the state) is after the end of the first special game state (after the end of the big hit game state), the transition of which is determined by the lottery means (main CPU 101) triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first start area (first start opening 414b) ) Is greater than the probability of becoming the first specific state (first time saving game state).

  FIG. 7D shows an example of distribution of open patterns belonging to the first pattern group. The open pattern A is associated with the random number value of the normal symbol 1 to which the random number in the range where the selection rate in the ordinary symbol is 50/100 (for example, 0 to 49 in 0 to 99) is associated, and in the regular symbol The open pattern B is associated with the random number value of the normal symbol 2 to which another random number value (for example, 50 to 99 in 0 to 99) in the range where the selectivity is 50/100 belongs.

  FIG. 7E shows an example of distribution of the open patterns belonging to the second pattern group. In the normal symbol, the open pattern C is associated with the random number value of the ordinary symbol 1 to which the random number value in the range in which the selection rate is 80/100 (for example, 0 to 79 in 0 to 99) is associated, and in the ordinary symbol. The open pattern D is associated with the random number value of the ordinary symbol 2 to which another random number value (for example, 0 to 99, 80 to 99) in the range where the selectivity is 20/100 belongs.

[Explanation of opening pattern]
Next, the opening patterns A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
As described above, the opening patterns A to D are a combination of the drive pattern of the normal electric auditors product 415a and the drive pattern of the distribution device 506. Further, in the normal game state, the normal electric auditors product 415a is closed, and the distribution device 506 is a state in which the game balls are distributed to the first non-electrical auditors product 415b side.

  According to the opening pattern A, as shown in FIG. 8, the normal electric accessory 415a has a flat member 520 after the normal symbol game hits, or after the hit hits a predetermined hit start interval time. Repeat projecting and retracting twice. The time T1 for which the flat plate member 520 projects is set to the time required for the gaming ball located in the ball passage detector 416 to ride on the flat plate member 520 when the flat plate member 520 projects. After the flat plate member 520 is projected twice and retracted, the flat plate member 520 is in the retracted state until the next normal symbol game hits.

  The distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the side of the second non-electric role 415c at the timing when the normal symbol game hits, that is, the same timing as the normal electric role 415a, and immediately the first non-electric role. Switch to the object 415b side. Since this switching operation is performed within the time T2 until the game ball on the flat plate member 520 reaches the distribution plate 507, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. It is rarely done. Then, the distribution device 506 switches to the second non-electric accessory member 415c side when the predetermined time T3 has elapsed. The predetermined time T3 is set to a time required for the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a to project and retract 3 times from the time when the normal symbol game hits. The distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b side when a predetermined time T4 has elapsed since the path of the game ball was switched to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. The predetermined time T4 is set to a time such that the three game balls are distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side.

  According to the opening pattern B, as shown in FIG. 8, the normal electric accessory 415a is a plate member after the normal symbol game hits, or after hitting a predetermined hit start interval time. The protrusion and the retraction of 520 are repeated three times in succession. The time T1 during which the flat plate member 520 projects is the same as that of the opening pattern A. The distribution device 506 switches to the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the second non-electric accessory 415c side in the same pattern as the opening pattern A.

  In this way, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B belonging to the first opening pattern group are driven by the normal electric auditors product 415a within the time when the distribution device 506 distributes the game balls to the first non-electrical auditors product 415b. Therefore, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is easily guided to the first non-electric accessory 415b. Here, in the opening pattern B, the allocating device 506 switches to the second non-electric auditors role 415c side after the time T2 has elapsed after the operation of the ordinary electric auditors role 415a ends, so that the flat plate member 520 is retracted. The time from switching to the distribution plate 507 is short. For this reason, the game ball riding on the flat plate member 520 just before the flat plate member 520 protruding for the third time is drawn may be rarely distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side.

  According to the opening pattern C, as shown in FIG. 9, the normal electric accessory 415a has a flat member 520 after the normal symbol game hits or after the hit hits a predetermined hit start interval time. Execute the projecting and retracting once. The time T2 ′ when the flat plate member 520 projects is set to a time when the game ball located in the ball passage detector 416 does not reach the flat plate member 520 when the flat plate member 520 projects. In other words, the game ball located in the ball passage detector 416 does not fall on the flat plate member 520. After that, the normal electric auditors role product 415a causes the flattening member 520 to project at the timing when the distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the second non-electricity role object 415c side, and switches to the first non-electricity role object 415b side. The flat plate member 520 is pulled in. That is, at the time T4 when the distribution device 506 distributes the game balls to the second non-electric accessory 415c side, the flat plate member 520 is in the protruding state. The flat plate member 520 is in the retracted state until the next normal symbol game hits.

  According to the opening pattern D, as shown in FIG. 9, the driving pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a at the time T4 when the flat plate member 520 is in the protruding state in the opening pattern C is a pattern in which the flat plate member 520 is projected three times. It is what The time for which the flat plate member 520 is projected is set to the time T1 as in the opening / closing pattern A. Other operations are the same as the opening pattern C.

  In this way, the opening pattern C and the opening pattern D belonging to the second opening pattern group are the normal electric auditors product 415a within the time T4 when the distribution device 506 distributes the game balls to the second non-electrical auditors product 415c. Since it is driven, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is easily guided to the second non-electric accessory 415c. Here, in the opening pattern D, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 415a at time T4 is intermittent, so that the gaming ball does not get on the flat plate member 520 more often than in the opening pattern C.

According to the above-described specifications of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol game, the small hit probability is 0/300 and the small hit does not occur, so that no V prize is won. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and as described above, the specification may be changed to a small hit in the first special symbol game. However, in order to make the second special symbol game more advantageous than the first special symbol game, it is desirable that the probability is smaller than the small hit probability (299/100) in the second special symbol game.
Further, even in a big hit game by a big hit or a V big hit via the first special symbol game, the attacker 421 may be opened and closed instead of the shutter 417 in a predetermined round. Further, in the case of the V big hit through the small hit of the first special symbol game, the attacker 421 may be opened for all 15 rounds instead of the shutter 417 during the V big hit game. As described above, the attacker 421 is an example of the fifth displacement member.

[Electrical structure of gaming machine]
A block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 200 for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), and a main RAM 103 (readable / writable memory).

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101, and have a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, for example, a program for causing the main CPU 101 to execute the processes shown in FIGS. 11 to 37, various tables, and the like. There is.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. Although the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The main control circuit 100 also sends a reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 that generates a clock pulse of a predetermined frequency, an initial reset circuit 105 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and a command to the sub control circuit 200 described later. It is provided with a serial communication IC 106 for supplying. The reset clock pulse generation circuit 104, the initial reset circuit 105, and the serial communication IC 106 are connected to the main CPU 101.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later.

  The initial reset circuit 105 includes a capacitor and a watchdog timer, and sends a reset signal to the main CPU 101 when the voltage applied to the capacitor reaches a certain value. In addition, the initial reset circuit 105 receives a predetermined control signal from the main CPU 101, and discharges to release the voltage applied to the capacitor.

  The serial communication IC 106 is connected to the main CPU 101, the sub control circuit 200, and the payout / launch control circuit 300, and includes a sub control board buffer and a payout / launch control circuit buffer.

  Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, as various devices responding to a signal from the main control circuit 100, a special symbol display device 431 that variably displays a special symbol in a special symbol game, a round number display device 432 that displays the number of rounds in a round game, a special symbol. Special symbol hold display device 433 that displays the number of variable display of special symbols in the game, normal symbol display device 434 that performs variable display of ordinary symbols as identification symbols in the ordinary symbol game, variable display of ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol game The normal symbol hold display device 435 that displays the number of holdings, the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a (see FIG. 5) is the open state or the closed state, the normal electric accessory solenoid 111, and the shutter 417 (see FIG. 4). ) Is driven, and the special winning opening 418 is opened or closed. The drive 112 and the movable member 426 (see FIG. 4) are driven to drive the V winning opening solenoid 117 and the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) that open or close the V winning opening 424 to open the opening / closing winning opening 420. The opening / closing winning opening solenoid 118 that is in a closed state or a closed state and the distribution plate 507 of the distribution device 506 (see FIG. 5) are driven to switch the passage route of the game ball to either the first passage 504 or the second passage 505. The distribution solenoid 121 and the like are connected. In addition, a calling device (not shown) that has the function of calling hall attendants and the function of displaying the number of hits, and an external terminal board used to send data to the hall computer that manages pachinko machines in the entire game hall (hall) are connected. Has been done.

  Further, various sensors are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, in the main control circuit 100, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening 418, the special winning opening count sensor 113 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 and the general winning opening 419a to 419c are played. When a ball wins, a general detection ball sensor 114a to 114c that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100, and when a game ball wins the ball passage detector 416, a predetermined detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 100. When the game ball is won in the ball passing detection sensor 115 and the central starting port 414a supplied to the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a and the first starting port 414b which supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100. When a game ball is won in the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b and the second starting opening 414c which supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when The second opening mouth winning ball sensor 116c that supplies a constant detection signal to the main control circuit 100, and the opening / closing winning hole count that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins the opening / closing winning hole 420. The sensor 120, the normal electric accessory entrance sensor 122 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when the game ball captured by the flat member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a is backed up at the time of power failure. A backup clear switch 123 or the like for clearing data in accordance with the operation of the manager of the game arcade is connected. In the present embodiment, winning means that a game ball passes through a region where the above-mentioned sensors are provided.

  A payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. To the payout / launch control circuit 300, a payout device 71 for paying out game balls, a launching device 20 for launching game balls, and a card unit 400 are connected. The card unit 400 can be transmitted / received to / from the lending operation unit 401 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of game balls to the card unit 400, by an operation of the player.

  The payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 400, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 71, The payout device 71 is caused to pay out the game balls. Further, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the launch solenoid in accordance with the turning angle when the launch handle 21 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise, and the game is played. Controls to launch a ball.

  Further, a sub control circuit 200 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 50, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 14, control of a lamp including a decorative lamp, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. ..

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200 and the sub control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. Not limited to this, the sub control circuit 200 may be configured to be able to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, an RTC 204, a display control circuit 210 for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 50, a voice control circuit 220 for controlling voice generated by the speaker 14, and a decorative lamp. It is composed of a lamp control circuit 230 for controlling the lamp 15 including the above, an effect button 16, and an operation means control circuit 240 for receiving an operation signal based on a player's operation from the touch sensor 450. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program and various tables for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer equipped with the control means. It may be in any other form as long as it is recorded in a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge. Further, these programs may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium.

  The work RAM 203 stores various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. Although the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used. The RTC 204 measures the current time.

  The display control circuit 210 is a circuit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 50, and includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, It is composed of a frame buffer for buffering image data, a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal, and the like.

  The display control circuit 210 is a device that can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 210 displays, on the liquid crystal display device 50, various image data such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data in accordance with an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data for the operation is temporarily stored in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 210 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 50 at a predetermined timing to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 50. That is, the display control circuit 210 controls the liquid crystal display device 50 to display an image related to a game.

  The voice control circuit 220 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 14. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 14 to generate audio.

  The lamp control circuit 230 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The operation unit control circuit 240 transmits the operation signal received from the effect button 16 to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 supplies the display control circuit 210 and the like with data for performing an effect according to the operation signal.

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 37.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main processing under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 and 12 are flowcharts showing an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

  In step S11, a watchdog timer disable setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the watchdog timer to be disabled. When this process ends, the process moves to step S12.

  In step S12, input / output port setting processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to step S13.

  In step S13, a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). When the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, and the process proceeds to step S13. When the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the procedure goes to step S14. If the power interruption detection signal is HI, the process is determined to be in the power interruption detection state, the process is moved to step S13 again, and this is repeated until it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set.

  In step S14, a sub-control reception acceptance wait process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to step S15.

  In step S15, a RAM write permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S16.

  In step S16, it is determined whether the backup clear switch 123 (see FIG. 10) is on. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear switch 123 (see FIG. 10) is on, the process proceeds to step S24, and if it is determined that the backup clear switch 123 is not on, step S24 is performed. The processing moves to S17.

  In step S17, a process of determining whether or not the power failure detection flag is present is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18 when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is present, and moves the process to step S24 when it is not determined that the power failure detection flag is present.

  In step S18, processing for calculating the work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process damage check and calculates a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to step S19.

  In step S19, a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, when determining that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 101 moves the process to step S20, and when not determining that the work damage check value is a normal value, proceeds to step S24. Transfer processing.

  In step S20, a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S21.

  In step S21, a work area initial setting process at power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process of the work area at power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to step S22.

  In step S22, processing for transmitting a command for power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 200 a command for returning to the game state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to step S23.

  In step S23, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 initializes the devices around the main CPU 101. When this processing is completed, the address is restored to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  In step S24, a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

  In step S25, a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination. When this process ends, the process moves to step S26.

  In step S26, all work area clear processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the entire work area. When this process ends, the process moves to step S27 (see FIG. 12).

  In step S27, a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the big hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to step S28.

  In step S28, the work area is initialized when the RAM is initialized. In this process, the main CPU 101 initializes the work area when the main RAM 103 is initialized. When this process ends, the process moves to step S29.

  In step S29, a process of transmitting a command for initializing the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 103 to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the sub control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

  In step S30, CPU peripheral device initialization processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 initializes the devices around the main CPU 101. When this process ends, the process moves to step S31.

  In step S31, interrupt prohibition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to step S32.

  In step S32, initial value random number updating processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to step S33.

  In step S33, interrupt permission processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to step S34.

  In step S34, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the random number counter for effect. When this process ends, the process moves to step S35.

  In step S35, the main CPU 101 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 103, and when the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, moves the processing to step S36, and the system timer monitoring timer value is If the number is not 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S31.

  In step S36, the value of the system timer monitoring timer is decremented by 3. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S37.

  In step S37, timer update processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200, and the opening time of the special winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) by driving the shutter 417. Special winning device opening time timer for opening, opening and closing winning opening timer for measuring the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 420 (see FIG. 4) by driving the attacker 421, V winning by driving the movable member 426 Processing for updating various timers such as a V winning opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the mouth 424 is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S38.

  In step S38, special symbol control processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to hit in accordance with the detection signals from the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting port winning ball sensor 116c. The random number value and the random number for winning symbol determination are extracted, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) is won by referring to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 102. Processing for storing in the RAM 103 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S39.

  In step S39, normal symbol control processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the ball passage detection sensor 115, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 102, and then the normal symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not the player has won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 103. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the specification shown in FIG. 7, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state (non-time saving game state) is 0%, and the normal symbol lottery is won in the time saving game state. The probability of doing is 100%. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 415a operates only in the time saving game state.

  When the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a projects, and the game ball rides on the flat member 520, whereby the blade member of the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c. Becomes open, and the game ball easily enters the first starting port 414b or the second starting port 414c (see FIG. 4). When this process ends, the process moves to step S40.

  In step S40, a symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101, in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S38 and S39, and the result of the normal symbol control process, the special symbol display device 431 and the normal symbol display device 434. The control signal for driving and is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 transmits this control signal to the special symbol display device 431 or the normal symbol display device 434. The special symbol display device 431 variably displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. The normal symbol display device 434 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to step S41.

  In step S41, a distribution device control process is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 101 issues a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 121 based on a preset distribution pattern in synchronization with the drive start timing of the normal electric auditors companion 415a. The process of storing in. When this process ends, the process moves to step S39.

  In step S42, non-electric auditor accessory management processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 101, after winning the normal symbol game in the normal symbol control process of step S39, the normal electric auditors object entrance sensor 122, the first photo sensor 508, and the first start. Based on the detection results of the mouth-winning prize ball sensor 116b, the second photo sensor 509, and the second starting mouth-winning prize ball sensor 116c, a process of monitoring whether an abnormality has occurred is performed. When the main CPU 101 determines that an abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing a control signal informing the error in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S43.

  In step S43, game information data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer and storing the data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S44.

  In step S44, a symbol reserve number data generation process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 causes the central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting detected in the switch input processing (step S305 of FIG. 34) in the timer interrupt processing described later. Based on the detection signals from the mouth-winning ball sensor 116c and the ball passage detection sensor 115 and the update result of the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 103 which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, A process of storing a control signal for holding and displaying a symbol and a normal symbol in the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S45.

  In step S45, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 103 from each port in the above steps. Specifically, an LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED and a solenoid power source for driving the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 (see FIG. 5) for projecting and retracting the flat plate member 520 of the normal electric accessory 415a. , A solenoid power supply for driving the opening / closing winning opening solenoid 118 (see FIG. 5) that drives the attacker 421 of the opening / closing winning opening 420, and a V winning opening solenoid 117 (see FIG. 5) driving the movable member 426 of the V winning opening 424. Supply solenoid power to drive the. When this process ends, the process moves to step S46.

  In step S46, command control processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time saving game state flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and when it is determined that the time saving game state flag is set, generates a time saving game state flag command The process of transmitting to the control circuit 200 is performed. In addition, in this processing, the main CPU 101 supplies various commands to the sub control circuit 200. As these various commands, for example, a demo display command derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50, a derived symbol designation command described later, a variation pattern designation command described later, a big hit start command described later, a small hit start command described later, The starting mouth winning command and the like which will be described later are included. In this process, the main CPU 101 supplies to the sub control circuit 200, in addition to various commands, data indicating the value of a time saving state variation counter described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S47.

  In step S47, payout processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game balls have won the general winning openings 419a to 419c, the central starting opening 414a, the first starting opening 414b, the second starting opening 414c, the large winning opening 418, and the opening / closing winning opening 420. When there is a winning, the payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 300. When this process ends, the process moves to step S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in step S38 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in FIG. 13, the numerical values (00H to 10H) described in the vicinity of steps S62 to S72 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 103. Has been done. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and the special symbol game proceeds.

  First, in step S61, a process of loading the control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S62.

  In addition, in steps S62 to S72 described below, the main CPU 101 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S62 to S72 to be executed. In addition to that, the main CPU 101 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing in each step is ended without being executed, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S62, a special symbol storage check process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of special symbols reserved when the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When this process ends, the process moves to step S63.

  In step S63, special symbol variation time management processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, and a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation. (When the special symbol fluctuation stops changing), the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S64 after the waiting time after confirmation elapses. When this process ends, the process moves to step S64.

  In step S64, special symbol display time management processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and the waiting time after confirmation elapses, the main CPU 101 wins (big hit). Or a small hit). In the case of a small hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed, the process of step S65 is set to be executed.

  Further, in the case of a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating big hit start interval management in a control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the big hit start interval in a waiting time timer. That is, the processing of step S68 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a win. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S72.

  In step S65, a small hit start interval management process is executed. Although details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, when the control state flag has a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 Data for opening the opening / closing winning opening 420 read from the main ROM 102 is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, in the process of step S45 of FIG. 12, the main CPU 101 reads the data for opening the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) stored in the main RAM 103, and outputs a signal indicating that the attacker 421 (see FIG. 4) is released. Is supplied to the opening / closing winning port solenoid 118. In this way, the main CPU 101 and the like control the opening / closing of the attacker 421. That is, the "small hit game" is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the small hit is in progress in the control state flag, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the attacker 421 in the attacker opening time timer. In addition, it is set to execute the process of step S66. When this process ends, the process moves to step S66.

  In step S66, the small hitting process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening processing (07H) or the small hit end post-processing (05H) in the control state flag according to the conditions. When this process ends, the process moves to step S67.

  In step S67, a process after the end of the small hit is executed. Although details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, after closing the attacker 421, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 424 in the V winning device 422. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S68.

  In step S68, a big hit start interval management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that the main CPU 101 has a main state when the control state flag has a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed. The data for opening the special winning opening 418 read from the ROM 102 is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the main CPU 101 reads out the data for opening the special winning opening 418 stored in the main RAM 103, and supplies a signal to the effect that the shutter 417 is operated to open the special winning opening 418 to the special winning opening solenoid 112. To do. In this way, the main CPU 101 and the like control the opening and closing of the shutter 417. That is, the "big hit game" is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S69. When this process ends, the process moves to step S69.

  In step S69, a special winning opening opening process is executed. Although details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening winning counter to "10" or more when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open. And the condition that the upper limit opening time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 418 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum winning opening opening maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. In the final round, the main CPU 101 sets a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S71. On the other hand, when it is not the final round, a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening is set in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S70.

  In step S70, a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening counter when the control state flag has a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The memory is updated so as to increase by 1 ". The main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S69. When this process ends, the process moves to step S69.

  In step S71, a big hit end interval process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (09H) indicating a hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, the special symbol game. A value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S72. When this process ends, the process moves to step S72.

  In step S72, special symbol game end processing is executed. Although details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. .. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S62. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H” in order when the hit determination result indicates a loss, and thus the steps shown in FIG. The processing of S62, step S63, step S64, and step S72 will be executed at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "06H" in order when the result of the hit determination is a big hit when the game is not the big hit or the small hit game state. As a result, the processing of step S62, step S63, step S64, and step S68 shown in FIG. 13 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the jackpot gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "07H" and "08H" in order, thereby performing the processes of step S69 and step S70 shown in FIG. Is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game is executed. In addition, when the termination condition of the big hit game is satisfied, by sequentially setting "07H", "09H", and "10H", the processing of step S69, step S71, and step S72 shown in FIG. 13 is performed at a predetermined timing. The game of big hit is finished.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" in order when the result of the hit determination is a small hit when the game is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By doing so, the processing of step S62, step S63, step S64, and step S65 shown in FIG. 13 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the small hitting game state is executed. Furthermore, when the control to the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H" to execute the process of step S66 shown in FIG. 13 at a predetermined timing. The big hit game will be executed. In addition, when the ending condition of the small hit game is satisfied, "05H" and "10H" are sequentially set to execute the processing of steps S67 and S72 shown in FIG. The game will end.

[Special symbol memory check process]
The subroutine (special symbol storage check process) executed in step S62 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 14, in step S71, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S72. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 does not determine that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S72, processing for determining whether or not the special figure 1 starting memory is present is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101, the presence or absence of the start memory of the first special symbol game by winning in the central starting port 414a or the first starting port 414b, that is, data is stored in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) It is determined whether or not there is. When the main CPU 101 determines that there is no starting memory for the first special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S73. If it is determined that there is a start memory for the first special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S77.

  In step S73, processing for determining whether or not the special figure 2 starting memory is present is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a start memory of the second special symbol game by winning the second start opening 414c, that is, whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (0). To do. When the main CPU 101 determines that there is no starting memory for the second special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S74. If it is determined that there is a starting memory for the second special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S75.

  Here, data such as a big hit determination random number value and a big hit symbol determination random value corresponding to the changing first special symbol game are stored as start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. The information of the four special symbol games that are held is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Data such as a big hit determination random number value and a big hit symbol determination random value corresponding to the changing second special symbol game are stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. The second special symbol game, there is no starting memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0 ) Is not stored, the process is executed when the second starting opening 414c is won. Therefore, it is possible to hold a maximum of four times.

  In step S74, demo display processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. Furthermore, the state where the starting memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 (the state in which the random number for hit determination is not stored in the first special symbol starting storage region and the second special symbol starting storage region) is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) If maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the demo display command data when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as a demo display command. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the demo display to be displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S75, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating a fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S76.

  In step S76, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S80.

  In step S77, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S78.

  In step S78, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S79.

  In step S79, special symbol storage transfer processing is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first special symbol starting storage area (0) from the first special symbol A process of shifting (storing) to the starting storage area (3) is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S80.

  In step S80, a hit determination process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 102, is extracted at the time of starting winning, and is set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). The random number for hit determination in the special symbol starting storage area and the hit determination table are referred to. Then, when the random number for hit determination and the hit determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit or a small hit. If it is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", it is determined to be lost. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether to make the "big hit game state" and whether to make the "small hit game state". It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is a small hit also includes a lottery probability of 0. When this process ends, the process moves to step S81.

  In step S81, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, which is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case, that is, in the case of losing, the process of determining the losing symbol is performed. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S82.

  In step S82, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101, the special symbol determined in the process of step S81, based on the result of the hit determination determined in the process of step S80, a variation pattern determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern select. Then, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 431 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the special symbol display device 431. As a result, the special symbol display device 431 variably displays the special symbol in the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 as a special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the process moves to step S83.

  In step S83, special symbol variation time setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in a waiting time timer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S84.

  In step S84, the special symbol effect start command is set in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The special symbol effect start command includes data relating to the game state, the variation pattern, the special symbol, the remaining number of shortening times, and the like. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will start the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the process moves to step S85.

  Then, in step S85, the main CPU 101 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in step S81 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S91, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the hit determination (step S80). If it is determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to step S92. If it is not determined that the jackpot is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S97.

  In step S92, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S93. If it is not determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S95.

  In step S93, a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol game based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to step S94.

  In step S94, a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the first special symbol game are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 variably displays the first special symbol to stop and display in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol game. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. As a result, by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S95, a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol game is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol game, based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to step S96.

  In step S96, a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the second special symbol game are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 variably displays the special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol game. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. As a result, by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S97, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S98 when the result of the hit determination (step S80) is a small hit. If it is not determined that it is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In step S98, a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol game is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol game according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determination counter. When this process ends, the process moves to step S99. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is only the second special symbol that the "small hit" is won.

  In step S99, the data set of the small hit symbol and the command set of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S100, a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 variably displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, by the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol for effect is derived and displayed in the display area 51 in the lost stop display mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, since the small hit probability in the first special symbol game is 0, the determination of the small hit symbol in the first special symbol game and the data of the small hit symbol, There is no processing to set the command. However, in the case of a specification in which there is a small hit in the first special symbol game, it is advisable to add processing corresponding to steps S92 to S94 executed in the case of a big hit after step S97.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
A subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) executed in step S63 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and it is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S102, and if it is not determined to be the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, this subroutine ends.

  In step S102, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0", and when determining that the waiting time timer is "0", shifts the processing to step S103. When it is not determined that the waiting time timer is "0", this subroutine is finished.

  In step S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S104.

  In step S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to step S105.

  In step S105, after the confirmation, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the post-determination wait time in an area of the main RAM 103 that functions as a wait time timer. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in step S64 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to step S112. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S112, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0" when the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. To determine. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is finished.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process moves to step S119. If it is not a big hit, the process moves to step S114.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. If it is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S115. If not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S124.

  In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the small hit in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be 5000 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol production stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol production stop. When this process ends, the process moves to step S118.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or the small hit start. .. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S120.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs processing for turning off (clearing) the time saving game state flag of the main RAM 103. In the "big hit game state", the "time saving game" is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the number of consecutive hours saved is not cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to step S121.

  In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the big hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be 5000 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to step S122.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol production stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol production stop. When this process ends, the process moves to step S123.

  In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the big hit start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit start. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game ending process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S125.

  In step S125, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. This special symbol production stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol production stop. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Small hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (small hitting start interval management process) executed in step S65 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S131, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to step S132. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management processing, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management process is "0", that is, whether the small hit start interval time has been exhausted. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is finished.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an open / close winning port opening number counter upper limit value related to the opening number of the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 increments the open / close winning opening opening counter by one. When this process ends, the process moves to step S135. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the opening / closing winning opening number counter set in the process of step S133 is limited to "1", and thus the processes of steps S134 and S135 can be omitted.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S136.

  In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the opening / closing winning opening opening display command data for the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The display command data during opening / closing prize opening is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a display command during opening / closing prize opening under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. When this process ends, the process moves to step S137.

  In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the open / close winning opening prize counter regarding the number of winnings of the attacker 421. When this process ends, the process moves to step S139.

  In step S139, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer for the opening time of the attacker 421 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The waiting time may be 1200 ms or 1500 ms, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to step S140.

  In step S140, the main CPU 101, regarding the operation of the movable member 426 of the V winning opening 424, indicates whether or not the movable member 426 is operating and is in the open state (hereinafter referred to as a moving flag). ) Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Small hit processing]
The subroutine (process during small hit) executed in step S66 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S141, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (04H) indicating the process during small hit. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to step S142. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S142, it is determined whether the open / close winning a prize counter of the attacker 421 is 1 or more. When the open / close winning opening counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S148. If the open / close winning a prize counter is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S143.

  In step S143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the processing during the small hit is "0". That is, it is determined whether the waiting time timer has become 0 and the opening time of the attacker 421 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S155. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is finished.

  In step S148, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the waiting time timer corresponding to the processing during the small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to step S149.

  In step S149, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S150. When there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S155.

  In step S150, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening process (07H) in the control state flag. That is, in step S149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is present, preparation for the "big hit game" starting from the "V big hit" has been started. When this process ends, the process moves to step S151.

  In step S151, a process of setting the special winning opening opening counter to "2" is performed. In this process, the "V jackpot game" that starts from the "V jackpot" is the first round when the attacker 421 that enters the V winning opening 424 is opened, and the subsequent "jackpot game" is a jackpot 418. This is the process that occurs when the second release is the second round. When this process ends, the process moves to step S152.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as the start interval time per V. It should be noted that this time may be the same as the inter-round interval, for example, 5000 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to step S153.

  In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs processing for turning off the V winning flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S154.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the V hit start command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating post-small hit completion process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S156.

  In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit. This time may be 5000 ms, for example. This processing is necessary to perform processing for confirming that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 424 after closing the attacker 421. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close winning opening opening counter upper limit value set in the process of step S133 is "1". However, when it is larger than "1", instead of step S143 shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, it is advisable to add the processes of steps S143 to S147 described below.

  In step S143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the processing during the small hit is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer has reached 0 and the opening time or closing time of the attacker 421 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the processing is moved to step S147.

  In step S144, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening / closing winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the opening / closing opening upper limit value set in step S133. The main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S148 when the opening / closing winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the opening / closing opening upper limit value. If the opening / closing winning opening opening counter is not equal to or more than the opening / closing opening upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S145.

  In step S145, if the current time is closing, the main CPU 101 increments the open / close winning opening opening counter by one. That is, when the opening / closing winning opening number counter is not equal to or more than the maximum winning opening upper limit value, the "small hitting game state" is continued, the attacker 421 which is in the closed state is later opened, and the opening / closing winning opening is opened again. In order to determine the number of times the attacker 421 of the number counter has been opened, 1 is added to the special winning opening opening number counter. When this process ends, the process moves to step S146.

  In step S146, the main CPU 101 sets the next opening / closing mode data and opening / closing timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S147.

  In step S147, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning in the V winning opening 424. If the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is finished.

[Post-processing after small hits]
The subroutine (process after the small hit end) executed in step S67 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-small hit completion process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the completion of the small hit, the process proceeds to step S162. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the post-small hit end processing, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the small ball end time remaining ball monitoring time timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the residual monitoring time at the end of the small hit has been exhausted. When the timer value is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S164. When the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the processing is moved to step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. Whether or not there is a V winning flag is determined at this timing, and even if a fraudulent act such that the V winning flag is intentionally made is performed at timings other than these, the determination of the V winning flag is not performed. Not done When the V winning flag is present, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S150 in FIG. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S165.

  In step S165, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in step S68 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the big hit start interval management process, in step S171, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to step S172. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S172, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the big hit start interval management processing is "0" when the control state flag has a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management processing. judge. Further, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S173 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

  In step S173, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value for the special winning opening 418 of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, the "big hit game" by the special symbol is a big hit for all 15 rounds, so the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value is set to "15". When this process ends, the process moves to step S174.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S176.

  In step S176, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The special winning opening open display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. When this process ends, the process moves to step S177.

  In step S177, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S178.

  In step S178, the main CPU 101 executes processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S179.

  In step S179, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Prize winning opening process]
The subroutine (special winning opening opening process) executed in step S69 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the special winning opening opening process, as shown in FIG. 22, in step S181, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to step S182. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S182, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening prize counter is "10" or more. In this processing, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S185, and does not determine that the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this case, the process proceeds to step S183.

  In step S183, the special winning opening opening / closing processing according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 417 to open / close the special winning opening 418. Specifically, according to the opening / closing pattern for each round, the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the special winning opening 418 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S184.

  In step S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer of the predetermined area functioning as the special winning opening opening time timer in the main RAM 103 is "0", the process proceeds to step S185, and the waiting time timer is "0". When it is not determined that there is, this subroutine is ended. That is, when it is determined that the special winning opening prize counter is "10" or more, or when it is determined that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0", the processing is moved to step S185, and the special winning opening winning is performed. When it is not determined that the counter is "10" or more, and when it is not determined that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0", this subroutine is ended.

  In step S185, processing for clearing the special winning opening time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing a predetermined area in the main RAM 103 which functions as a special winning opening opening time timer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S186.

  In step S186, processing for setting the special winning opening closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the special winning opening 418. The variable thus stored causes the special winning opening solenoid 112 to be driven and the shutter 417 to be closed by the processing in step S45 of FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to step S187.

  In step S187, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the maximum opening opening upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the special winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 103 with a special winning opening opening upper limit value (for example, 15 times) or more, and the large winning opening opening counter is large. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the number of winning openings. When it determines with it being more than the maximum winning opening number upper limit value, a process is moved to step S191, and when it is not determined that it is more than a maximum winning port opening number upper limit value, a process is moved to step S188.

  In step S188, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 as the inter-round interval time and the remaining ball monitoring time. When this process ends, the process moves to step S189.

  In step S189, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S190.

  In step S190, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting display command data between rounds in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S191, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a jackpot end interval time and a remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S192.

  In step S192, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process as a control state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 which functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S193.

  In step S193, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the special symbol-per-interval end display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Waiting time management process before re-opening the special winning opening]
The subroutine (the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process) executed in step S70 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing, as shown in FIG. 23, in step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management processing. Processing for determining whether or not to perform is performed. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time before pre-opening big winning opening management process, the process proceeds to step S202. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time before pre-reopening big winning opening management process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S202, when the control state flag has a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening, the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval time is "0". It is determined whether or not. Further, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of step S203 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

  In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S204.

  In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting (storing) the special winning opening open display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command data is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening display command. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform a round counter +1. When this process ends, the process moves to step S205.

  In step S205, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process as a control state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S206.

  In step S206, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S207.

  In step S207, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval process) executed in step S71 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S208, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, the process proceeds to step S209. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S209, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is "0". judge. That is, it is determined whether the jackpot end interval time has been exhausted and the value of the waiting time timer has become "0". Further, the main CPU 101 moves the process to step S210 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

  In step S210, the main CPU 101 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 to the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S214.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving in the game after the end of the big hit game state. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game after the big hit game state is short based on the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. If the time is short, the process proceeds to step S215. If there is no time saving, the process moves to step S219.

  In step S215, it is determined whether or not the game after the jackpot gaming state is the first short time game. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game after the end of the big hit game state is the first short time game based on the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. In the case of the first time saving game, the process proceeds to step S216. If it is not the first time saving game, the process proceeds to step S217.

  In step S216, the first time saving flag is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value for turning on the first time saving flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S218.

  In step S217, the second time saving flag is set. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) a value for turning on the second time saving flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S218.

  In step S218, the process of setting the number of time reductions is performed, and the process of setting the time reduction start flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the number of time saving in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, and also sets (storing) a value for turning on the time saving start flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Perform processing to In the present embodiment, "100" is set as the number of time reductions. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S219, a normal game state is set. The main CPU 101 performs a process of setting (storing) the normal game state in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, the normal game state is set when the time saving flag, that is, the value for turning off both the first time saving flag and the second time saving flag, is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Equivalent to. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of steps S208 to S219, that is, the jackpot end interval processing executed in step S71 is an example of a game state control means. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of steps S214 to S219 is an example of a game state setting means.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in step S72 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S221, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the process proceeds to step S222. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S222, it is determined whether or not there is a V winning flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a value for turning on the V winning flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the V winning flag, and a value for turning on the V winning flag is determined. If is set, the process moves to step S223. If the value for turning on the V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S225.

  In step S223, the V winning flag is turned off. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning off the V winning flag in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the V winning flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S224.

  In step S224, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the time saving start flag is on. If the time saving start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S228. If the time saving start flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S225.

  In step S225, the main CPU 101 increments the hour / hour counter by 1. When this process ends, the process moves to step S226.

  In step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hour / hour counter is equal to or greater than the hour / hour count, that is, 100 or more. When the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the hour / hour counter is 100 or more, the process proceeds to step S227. When it is not determined that the count value of the hour / hour counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S228. Further, in step S226, for example, when the hour / hour counter determines that the count value of 100 is 100 or more, and if the V jackpot is not reached during the 100 hour / hour games, the processing is moved to step S227. Clear the hour / hour counter.

  In step S227, the time saving flag is turned off (cleared). When this process ends, the process moves to step S229.

  In step S228, the main CPU 101 executes processing for turning off the time saving start flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S229.

  In step S229, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Normal symbol control processing]
The subroutine (normal symbol control process) executed in step S39 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 26, the numbers drawn on the sides of steps S230 to S235 indicate normal symbol control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as a normal symbol control state flag in the main RAM 103. ing. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and the normal symbol game proceeds.

  In step S230, the process of loading the normal symbol control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S231.

  In addition, in step S231 to step S235 described later, the main CPU 101 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the normal symbol control state flag, as described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any of the processes in steps S231 to S235. In addition to that, the main CPU 101 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing in each step is ended without being executed, and another subroutine is executed.

  In step S231, normal symbol storage check processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101, the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, and is a normal symbol hold storage number data that is data indicating the number of reserves related to the normal symbol. When the value of is greater than or equal to "1", it is determined whether the random number for hit determination matches the hit determination value (hit determination). When the random number for hit determination coincides with the hit determination value, the value (77) indicating the hit is stored in the main RAM 103 in the storage area of the main RAM 103 used as the hit flag, and the hit symbol is set to the predetermined value of the main RAM 103. Set in storage area. When the hit determination random number value matches the hit determination value, the lost symbol is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103.

  Here, in the first and second time saving game state and non-time saving game state (normal game state), different normal symbol winning tables are referred to. That is, in the first and second time saving game states, the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery is high (for example, 251/251) The normal symbol winning table is referred to, and in the non-time saving game state (normal game state), it is normal. The normal symbol winning table having a low probability of winning the symbol lottery (for example, 0/251) is referred to. In this way, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S231 is triggered by the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area (ball passage detector 416), and the third displacement member (flat plate member) in the second state (closed state). 520) is an example of a drive determination unit that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch 520) to the first state (open state).

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a normal symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The normal symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will start the effect based on the received normal symbol effect start command.

  Then, the main CPU 101 sets the value (01) indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process to the normal control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S232.

  In step S232, normal symbol variation time monitoring processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal control state flag is a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, when the value of the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0", the normal symbol display time monitoring A value (02) indicating the process is set in the normal control state flag and also set in the post-determination waiting time timer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S233.

  In step S233, normal symbol display time monitoring processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 has a normal control state flag that is a value (02) indicating the normal symbol display time management process, and if it is determined to be a hit, the wait time after confirmation is set. When the value of the waiting time timer that has been set is "0", the opening time and opening pattern are set, and the value (03) indicating the normal electric accessory release processing is set in the control state flag. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a hit, it sets a value (04) indicating the normal symbol game ending process in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to step S234 or step S235.

  In step S234, a normal electric accessory release process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal control state flag is a value (03) indicating the normal electric auditors opening process, and the value of the normal electric auditors opening time timer is "0", the normal symbol A value (04) indicating the end of the game is set in the normal control state flag. That is, the normal electric auditors role 415a is in the open state until the value of the normal electric officer opening time timer is "0", and the normal electric auditors object 415a is in the closing state when the value of the normal electric officer opening time timer is "0". It means that When this process ends, the process moves to step S235.

  In step S235, when the normal control state flag is the value (04) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol reserved storage number data, and the normal symbol starting storage data The storage area is shifted, the clear data is set in the area of the normal symbol starting storage data, and the value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process is set in the normal control state flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Normal pattern memory check process]
The subroutine (normal symbol storage check process) executed in step S231 of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal symbol storage check process, as shown in FIG. 27, in step S241, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal control state flag has a value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process. Further, the main CPU 101, when the normal control state flag is a value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the process proceeds to step S312, and the normal control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol storage check process (00). If not), this subroutine is finished.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol reserved storage number data (reserved number) stored in the main RAM 103 is "0". If the value of the normal symbol reserved storage number data (reserved number) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S243, and if the value of the normal symbol reserved storage number data (reserved number) is "0" , And moves the processing to step S251.

  In step S243, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the time saving state is the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state. In this process, when determining that either the first time saving flag or the second time saving flag is on, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S244. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that neither the first time saving flag nor the second time saving flag is on, that is, if the time saving game state is not determined, the process proceeds to step S245.

  In step S244, a process for determining a normal symbol hit with a high probability is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table having a high winning probability, and the game ball has passed the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the ball passage detector 416 included in the starting memory. It is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol hit determination that is extracted at the time matches. If they match, it is a win, and if they do not match, it is a loss. When this process ends, the process moves to step S246.

  In step S245, a process for determining a normal symbol hit with a low probability is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit determination table with a low winning probability, and the game ball has passed the hit determination value stored in the hit determination table and the ball passage detector 416 included in the starting memory. It is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol hit determination that is extracted at the time matches. If they match, it is a win, and if they do not match, it is a loss. When this process ends, the process moves to step S246. In the big hit game state, the time saving flag is turned off by the process of step S120 shown in FIG. 17, so the normal symbol hit determination is performed with reference to the hit determination table having a low winning probability. According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, since the winning probability based on the hit determination table having the low winning probability is “0”, the process of step S245 can be omitted.

  In step S246, open pattern setting processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 415a, that is, the drive pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 111. When this process ends, the process moves to step S247.

  In step S247, the main CPU 101 sets a normal symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The normal symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. The normal symbol effect start command includes data such as a game state, a variation time, a normal symbol, and an opening pattern of the normal electric auditors product 415a. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will start the effect based on the received normal symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the process moves to step S248.

  In step S248, the main CPU 101 normally sets a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) in the symbol waiting time timer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S249.

  In step S249, the main CPU 101 sets a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management to the normal control state flag. When this process ends, the process of step S250 is moved.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101 clears the storage area used for this change. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S251, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol demo display processing. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Open pattern setting process]
The subroutine (opening pattern setting process) executed in step S246 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S261, a process of determining whether or not the second short time gaming state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the current game state is the second time saving game state depending on the presence or absence of the second time saving flag. If it is determined that the second short time gaming state, it moves the process to step S262. If it is not determined to be in the second short time gaming state, the process proceeds to step S263.

  In step S262, a process of determining an opening pattern that makes it easier to guide the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 415c is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting an open pattern by random number lottery from the open pattern group in which the game ball is easily guided to the second non-electrical accessory 415c. Specifically, a process of selecting either the opening pattern C or the opening pattern D belonging to the second ordinary electric auditors product opening pattern group shown in FIG. 7E is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S263, a process of determining an opening pattern that makes it easier to guide the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting an open pattern by random number lottery from the open pattern group that easily guides the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 415b. Specifically, a process of selecting either the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B belonging to the first ordinary electric auditors product opening pattern group shown in FIG. 7D is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Normal symbol display time monitoring process]
The subroutine (normal symbol display time monitoring process) executed in step S233 of FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (02) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring (step S251), the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S252). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring, and, if it is determined that the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0", the process to step S253. Transfer. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 does not determine that the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol display time management, or when it does not determine that the normal symbol waiting time timer is "0". To end the present subroutine.

  In step S253, it is determined whether or not the hit flag is "77". In this process, if the main CPU 101 does not determine that the hit flag is "77", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S254, and if it determines that the hit flag is "77", step S256. Transfer processing to.

  In step S254, a process of setting a value (04) indicating the end of the normal symbol game as the normal symbol control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores a value indicating the end of the normal symbol game in the normal symbol control state flag. As a result, the ordinary electric accessory 415a is maintained in the closed state. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S256, the normal electric power combination opening time timer set is executed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes processing for setting a value indicating the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors product 415a in the ordinary electric auditors opening timer based on the opening / closing pattern set in step S246 (step S256). When this process ends, the process moves to step S257.

  In step S257, the value (03) indicating the opening of the normal electric power combination is set in the normal symbol control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores a value indicating the opening of the normal electric power combination in the normal symbol control state flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Distribution device control processing]
The subroutine (sorting device control process) executed in step S41 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S271, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S272 when the normal symbol control state flag is the value (03) indicating the opening of the normal electric accessory, and is not the value (03) indicating opening of the normal electric accessory. Then, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S272, the main CPU 101 sets a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 121 in the main RAM 103, based on the distribution pattern stored in the main RAM 103. By outputting this control signal from each port in step S45, solenoid power is supplied to the distribution solenoid 121 (see FIG. 10), and the distribution device 506 is driven. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. The distribution device control process may be executed, for example, in the normal electric auditors product opening process of step S234.

[Non-electric accessory management processing]
The subroutine (non-electric accessory management process) executed in step S42 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S275, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second time saving flag is on, and when determining that the second time saving flag is on, moves the process to step S276. If it is not determined that the second time saving flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S277.

  In step S276, the special figure 2 related sensor detection process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 transmits an error signal based on the detection results of the ordinary electric accessory ball entering sensor 122, the second photo sensor 509, and the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c. The process of determining whether or not to perform. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S277, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first time saving flag is ON, and when determining that the first time saving flag is ON, moves the process to step S278. When it is not determined that the second time saving flag is on, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S278, the special figure 1 related sensor detection process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 101 transmits an error signal based on the detection results of the normal electric accessory ball entering sensor 122, the first photo sensor 508, and the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b. The process of determining whether or not to perform. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special figure 2 related sensor detection processing]
A subroutine (special-figure 2 related sensor detection processing) executed in step S276 of FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  In step S280 shown in FIG. 32, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol game is a win. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal symbol game is a hit, that is, whether or not the hit flag (77) is stored in the main RAM 103. If it is determined that the normal symbol game is hit, the process proceeds to step S281. When it is not determined that the normal symbol game is won, the process is moved to step S286.

  In step S281, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the normal symbol game is a hit in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S282.

  In step S282, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 415a has been opened. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal electric auditors product 415a has been opened, that is, whether or not data instructing to open the normal electric auditors product 415a is stored in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that the normal electric auditors role product 415a has been opened, the process proceeds to step S283. If it is not determined that the ordinary electric auditors's figure 415a is opened, the process proceeds to step S284.

  In step S283, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S284.

  In step S284, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory entering ball sensor 122 is turned on. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the ordinary electric accessory hitting ball sensor 122 is on, that is, whether a detection signal from the ordinary electric accessory hitting ball sensor 122 is received. When it is determined that the normal electric auditors product entry sensor 122 has detected a game ball, the process proceeds to step S285. If it is not determined that the normal electric accessory entering ball sensor 122 has detected a game ball, the process proceeds to step S286.

  In step S285, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the normal electric accessory entering ball sensor 122 has detected a game ball in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S286.

  In step S286, a process of determining whether or not the second photo sensor 509 is turned on is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second photo sensor 509 is on, that is, whether or not a game ball detection signal is received from the second photo sensor 509. If it is determined that the second photo sensor 509 is on, the process proceeds to step S287. If it is not determined that the second photo sensor 509 is on, the process proceeds to step S289.

  In step S287, processing for activating the timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 activates a timer for measuring a predetermined time. Here, the predetermined time is set to about 10 seconds, for example. When this process ends, the process moves to step S288.

  In step S288, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing, in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, data indicating that the second photo sensor 509 is on, in other words, the non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state. .. When this process ends, the process moves to step S289.

  In step S289, a process for determining whether or not the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is turned on is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is turned on, that is, whether the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c detects a game ball. When it is determined that the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is on, the process proceeds to step S290. When it is not determined that the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is on, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c has detected a game ball in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S291.

  In step S291 shown in FIG. 33, a process of determining whether or not the second photo sensor 509 is off is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second photo sensor 509 is off. If it is determined that the second photo sensor 509 is off, the process proceeds to step S292. If it is not determined that the second photo sensor 509 is off, the process proceeds to step S293.

  In step S292, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing data indicating that the second photo sensor 509 is off, in other words, the non-electric accessory 415c is in the closed state, in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. .. When this process ends, the process moves to step S294.

  In step S293, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer has become "0", and when determining that the waiting time timer has become "0", moves the processing to step S294. If it is not determined that the timer has reached "0", this subroutine is terminated.

  In step S294, error determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of an error based on a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, and when there is an error, stores a control signal for notifying the occurrence of an error in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Perform (set) processing. This control signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, a hall computer in a game hall, and the like by the processing of step S45.

  Specifically, in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103, the data indicating that the normal symbol game is a hit, the data indicating that the normal electric accessory 415a has been opened, the normal electric accessory entrance sensor 122 is a game ball. Data indicating that the non-electrical accessory 415c is in the open state, data indicating that the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c has detected a game ball, the non-electrical accessory 415c is in the closed state. The data indicating that the data are stored in the memory are sequentially stored.

  The main CPU 101, the opening of the non-electric auditors object 415c and the game ball detection of the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c hit the ordinary symbol game, the opening of the ordinary electric auditors object 415a, the game of the ordinary electric actors entering ball sensor 122. If the order of sphere detection is not passed, it is judged as an error. As a specific example, there is no data indicating that the normal symbol game is a win, but there is data indicating that the normal electric accessory 415a has opened, or there is no data indicating that the normal electric accessory 415a has opened. However, if there is data in which the second start winning ball sensor 116c detects a game ball, it is determined as an error. In the former case, the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened even though the normal symbol game is not won, and there is a possibility that the second non-electric accessory 415c is forcibly opened. In the latter case, there is a possibility that the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c is operated by an unauthorized means. In this way, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the hall computer to notify a game hall clerk when there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed. Further, when the second non-electric accessory 415c is closed, if the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c does not detect a game ball, it is also determined as an error. In this case, it is possible that the second non-electric accessory 415c is clogged with game balls. However, even if the first non-electrical accessory 415b or the second non-electrical accessory 415c is not won, the normal symbol lottery is usually executed. Therefore, the main CPU 101 is the normal electric auditors ball entry sensor. 122, in the case of hitting a normal symbol game, in the order of opening the normal electric accessory object 415a and detecting the game ball of the normal electric accessory object ball sensor 122, it is not judged as an error.

  Further, the main CPU 101, if the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116c does not detect a game ball after the non-electrical accessory 415c is opened, but the non-electrical accessory 415c is closed. It is determined to be an error. In this case, there is a possibility that the non-electric accessory 415c is intentionally returned from the open state to the closed state in order to prevent illegal acts.

  Further, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an error if the non-electrical accessory 415c has not returned to the closed state even if the timer has become "0" after the non-electrical accessory 415c has been opened. In this case, the fact that the second non-electric accessory 415c is in the open state is notified to the player by image display or voice output by the liquid crystal display device 50, and data for urging the player to launch the game ball (right hit) is sent. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the process moves to step S295.

  In step S295, the timer is reset. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the timer value to the initial value before activation. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. The above data accumulated and stored in the main RAM 103 is erased by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Special figure 1 related sensor detection processing]
A subroutine (special-figure 1-related sensor detection processing) executed in step S278 of FIG. 31 will be described.

  In the special figure 1 related sensor detection processing, the same processing as the special figure 2 related sensor detection processing shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 is performed, and it is confirmed that the normal symbol game hits a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Data indicating, data indicating that the normal electric auditors product 415a has been opened, data indicating that the normal electric auditors product entering ball sensor 122 has detected a game ball, data indicating that the non-electric auditors accessory 415b is in an open state, Data indicating that the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b has detected a game ball, and data indicating that the non-electrical accessory 415b is in the closed state are cumulatively stored in order.

  Then, the main CPU 101 makes an error determination based on these data stored in the main RAM 103, and when there is an error, stores (sets) a control signal for notifying the occurrence of the error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Perform processing to This control signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, a hall computer in a game hall, and the like by the processing of step S45.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 101 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S301, a process of saving each register is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area) of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S302.

  In step S302, a timer update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the random number stored in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S303.

  In step S303, a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 105 (see FIG. 10). The initial reset circuit 105 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 105 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 105 is cleared, the main CPU 101 is reset from the initial reset circuit 105. A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 105, the main CPU 101 enters the system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to step S304.

  In step S304, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 101 updates the random numbers such as a big hit determination random number counter, a big hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. In addition, the big hit determination random number counter and the big hit symbol determination random number counter lack in fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite, so to ensure this, the fixed timing every 2 msec. I am trying to update it. When this process ends, the process moves to step S305.

  In step S305, switch input processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 101 is provided in the special winning opening count sensor 113 provided in the special winning opening 418, the general winning ball sensors 114a-114c provided in the general winning openings 419a-419c, and the ball passage detector 416. The ball passing detection sensor 115, the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b and the second starting port winning ball provided on the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b and the second starting port 414c. Each switch (sensor) receives a detection signal from the sensor 116c, the opening / closing winning opening count sensor 120 provided in the opening / closing winning opening 420, and the V winning ball sensor 119 provided in the V winning opening 424, so that each switch (sensor) has a game ball. Is detected. When the main CPU 101 determines that it has detected, the main CPU 101, depending on the detection, a special winning award ball counter, a general winning award ball counter, an opening / closing winning award ball counter, a starting mouth award ball counter, a V award ball counter. And so on. Details of the switch input process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S306.

  In step S306, movable member control processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the movable member 426. Details of this control will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S307.

  In step S307, register restoration processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input process of step S305 shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S311, prize ball-related detection processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 causes the special winning opening count sensor 113, the open / closed winning opening count sensor 120, the general winning opening ball sensors 114a to 114c, the central starting opening winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting. It is determined whether or not there is an input from the mouth winning ball sensor 116c, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. When the main CPU 101 determines that there is an input from the special winning opening count sensor 113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening award ball counter, and the general winning award ball sensors 114a to 114c receive the input. When it is determined that the value is 1, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning award winning ball counter is performed, and the input of the central starting award winning ball sensor 116a, the first starting award winning ball sensor 116b, and the second starting award winning ball sensor 116c. If it is determined that there is, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting mouth prize ball counter is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S312.

  In step S312, special symbol related detection processing is performed. The special symbol related processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S313.

  In step S313, normal symbol related detection processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the ball passage detection sensor 115, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. 4 pieces). When it is not determined to be the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for normal determination of the normal symbol game, and a random number value for random symbol determination is further extracted from the random number counter for random symbol determination, in the main RAM 103. Processing for storing in the normal symbol storage area is performed. When it is determined that the upper limit is reached, this subroutine is terminated. When this process ends, the process moves to step S314.

  In step S314, a V winning detection process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V prize ball sensor 119 has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and when it is determined that the input has been made, the V prize flag is turned on. Perform processing to In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is turned on only in the case of a small hit, and at other times, even if the V winning flag is turned on, special symbol game end processing 00H (FIG. 15) Clear). When this process ends, the process moves to step S315.

  In step S315, abnormality related detection processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred, based on the detection result of the abnormality-related sensor. When an abnormality is detected, a process for notifying the abnormality is performed, and when no abnormality is detected, this subroutine is finished as it is. As the abnormality-related sensor, a normal electric accessory entering ball sensor 122, a first photo sensor 508, a second photo sensor 509, an opening / closing switch of the glass door 10, and the like are applicable. The detection results of these sensors are output to the main CPU 101.

[Special symbol related detection processing]
The special symbol related detection processing of step S312 shown in FIG. 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S320, a process of determining whether or not it is the special game state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the special game state, that is, the big hit game state, the V big hit game state, or the small hit game state, and if it is determined that the special game state, the process proceeds to step S326. If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S321.

  In step S321, processing for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the stop display state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0) are data such as big hit random numbers If all the conditions that are not stored and the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is the stop display mode are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and any one of them is displayed. If the condition is not met, the process moves to step S326.

  In step S322, a process of determining whether or not a special figure 2 starting prize is detected is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the second starting winning ball sphere sensor 116c. If it is determined that the second starting mouth winning ball sensor 116c has been input, the process proceeds to step S323. If it is not determined that the second starting mouth winning ball sensor 116c has been input, the process proceeds to step S326. Transfer.

  In step S323, various random value acquisition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number value for jackpot determination used in the second special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery, hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2 lottery), and further jackpot symbol A process of extracting a big hit symbol determination random number value from the determination random number counter, extracting a production condition determination random number value from the production condition determination random number counter, and storing it in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. I do. When this process ends, the process moves to step S324. By the main CPU 101 executing the processing of steps S320 and S321, the special figure 2 lottery is not executed in the special game state, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not suspended. Therefore, in the special game state, even if a prize is rarely awarded to the second starting opening 414c, the prize does not trigger the transition to the special game state.

  In step S324, winning effect determination processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to step S325.

  In step S325, the main CPU 101 sets the second starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The second start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub control circuit 200 receives the second starting opening winning and the result of the winning lottery. Become aware of. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S326, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 starting prize is detected. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input from the central starting port winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting port winning ball sensor 116b. When it is determined that the center starting mouth winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting mouth winning ball sensor 116b is input, the process proceeds to step S327, and the central starting mouth winning ball sensor 116a or the first starting mouth winning ball sensor 116b. If it is not determined that the input has been made, the present subroutine is terminated.

  In step S327, a process of determining whether or not the starting memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the starting storage of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, this subroutine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to step S328.

  In step S328, a process of adding 1 to the starting memory of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S329. As described above, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of steps S327 and S328 is an example of the hold control unit.

  In step S329, various random value acquisition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts a big hit determination random number value to be used for the first special symbol game from the big hit determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery, hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1 lottery), and a big hit symbol. The jackpot symbol determination random number value is extracted from the determination random number counter, the effect condition determination random number value is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter, and processing for storing in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 103 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol starting storage area, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first special symbol starting storage area (0) The determination result based on the random number for hit determination stored in is derived and displayed by the special symbol, and various random number values obtained by starting winning during the change of the special symbol are the first special symbol starting storage area (1). ~ First special symbol starting storage area (4) is stored in order. When this process ends, the process moves to step S330.

  In step S330, winning effect determination processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to step S331.

  In step S331, the main CPU 101 sets the first starting opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The first start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the control of the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100, so that the sub control circuit 200 receives the first starting opening winning and the winning lottery result. Become aware of. The data of the first starting opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed as an effect when it is determined that the winning effect is achieved in the process of step S330. There is. As a result, it is possible to perform a so-called "pre-reading effect," which is a well-known technique in which an effect is executed based on the startup memory information before the variation execution. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, various commands set in the main RAM 103 of the main control circuit 100 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 100.

[Movable member control processing]
The movable member control process of step S306 shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S341, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the process during small hit. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to step S342. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to step S344.

  In step S342, a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 426 is operating is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine if it is determined that there is a moving flag, and moves the process to step S343 if it is determined that there is no moving flag.

  In step S343, the movable member 426 is started to operate, and the process of turning on the moving flag is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S344, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the post-small hit completion process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the completion of the small hit, the process proceeds to step S345. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the process after the completion of the small hit, the process proceeds to step S347.

  In step S345, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small ball end remaining ball monitoring time is zero. When determining that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S346. When it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, this subroutine is ended. In the present embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and the "V prize" is valid until 5000 msec elapses, so that the movable member is also movable.

  In step S346, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable member 426 and turns off the moving flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, when the residual ball monitoring time at the end of small hit 5000 msec has elapsed, the moving flag is turned off and the "small hit game state" ends.

  In step S347, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to step S348. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S348, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine if it is determined that there is no moving flag, and moves the process to step S349 if it is determined that there is a moving flag. If the "V prize" is given in the "small hit", the moving flag is on, so the process proceeds to step S349, and if it is simply the "big hit", this subroutine is ended.

  In step S349, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable member 426 and turns off the moving flag. That is, in the "big hit game", the movable member 426 does not need to operate. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Sub-control main processing]
The sub-control main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 100 and performs various processing such as display processing. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In step S1011 initialization processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of initialization setting in response to power-on. For example, when RAM clear information is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, all flags are turned off and the RAM clear flag is turned on. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1012. This initialization processing can also be performed according to the on / off operation of the power supply.

  In step S1012, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random number stored in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1013.

  In step S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 100 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. This processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1014.

  In step S1014, effect control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the production using the production button 16 and the touch sensor 450, for example. Moreover, you may perform the pre-reading holding production | generation control etc. regarding a reserve ball by what is called a pre-reading production mentioned above. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1015.

  In step S1015, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the display control circuit 210. In the display control circuit 210, VDP (not shown) is based on data for displaying an effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201, and various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data. Are read out from the image data ROM, and are superimposed and displayed on the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1016.

  In step S1016, sound / lamp control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a voice control process for controlling a sound generated from the speaker 14 and a lamp control process for controlling light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process ends, the process moves to the random number update process (step S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 38 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S1021, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to step S1022.

  In step S1022, timer update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, a process for updating a timer for round effects or the like is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1023.

  In step S1023, effect button switch input detection processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of input of a switch (not shown) by operating the effect button 16 or the touch sensor 450. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1024. Although the effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, other interrupts may be used.

  In step S1024, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in step S1021 to each register. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 38 is being executed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the command interrupt processing may be executed. The command interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In step S1031, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to step S1032.

  In step S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1033.

  In step S1033, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in step S1031 to each register. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in step S1013 of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

  In step S1041, processing is performed to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it is determined that there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S1042, and the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command. If no determination is made, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1042, processing is performed to determine whether the received command is a special symbol effect start command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to step S1043, and if it is not determined to be the special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to step S1044.

  In step S1043, a special symbol effect start command reception process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect setting of the special symbol game. Specifically, a process of storing in the work RAM 203 the data relating to the game state, the variation pattern, the special symbol, and the remaining number of times saved, which are included in the special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined to be the symbol stop command, the process proceeds to step S1045, and if not to be the special symbol effect stop command, the process proceeds to step S1046.

  In step S1045, the process at the time of receiving the symbol stop command is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as stopping the identification symbol for effect in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol under the control of the main control circuit 100, for example. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a big hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1047. If it is not determined that the command is a big hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1048.

  In step S1047, a big hit start command reception process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing, in the work RAM 203, data related to effects before the start of the round game, such as effects of big hit notification and effects of right-handing instruction. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1049. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to step S1050.

  In step S1049, processing for receiving a small hit start command is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 data related to effects before the attacker 421 is opened, such as effects of a small hit notification and effects of a right-handing instruction. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a V jackpot start command. When it is determined that the command is the V jackpot start command, the process proceeds to step S1051. When it is not determined that the command is the V jackpot start command, the process proceeds to step S1052.

  In step S1051, the V big hit start command reception process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing, in the work RAM 203, data related to effects before the start of the round game, such as effects of V jackpot notification and effects of right-handing instruction. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special winning opening opening display command. If it is determined that the command is for displaying the special winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1053. If it is not determined that the command is for displaying the special winning port, the process proceeds to step S1054.

  In step S1053, a process at the time of receiving the special winning opening open display command is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing data on effects during the round game in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a normal symbol effect start command. If it is determined that the command is a normal symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to step S1055. If it is not determined that the command is a normal symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to step S1056.

  In step S1055, a normal symbol effect start command reception process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing in the work RAM 203 the data relating to the game state, the variable time, the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric auditors included in the normal symbol effect start command. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon reception of other commands. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Game explanation of pachinko gaming machine 1]
FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a gaming method in the normal gaming state and the first shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a gaming method in the normal gaming state and the second shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is.

  In the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), since the winning probability of the normal symbol game is 0 because it is in the non-time saving state, for example, as shown by the arrow a2, a right hit is performed and the game ball is played. The normal electric accessory 415a does not open even when the light is passed through the ball passage detector 416. Therefore, neither the first non-electrical accessory 415b nor the second non-electrical accessory 415c is opened. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, as shown by the arrow a1 in FIG. 43, the player is left-handed to aim for winning at the central starting opening 414a.

  In the normal game state, when a prize is won in the central starting opening 414a, special figure 1 lottery is performed. When the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state, and the big hit game ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 7C, the game state shifts to either the normal game state or the second shorter time gaming state.

  In the second short time gaming state, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), since the winning probability of the universal drawing lottery is 100%, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416, the ordinary electric auditors product 415a is always opened. .. For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right hit and switch the hitting method for passing the game ball to the ball passing detector 416. Then, when the normal electric auditors role 415a opens and captures the game ball, the game ball actuates the second non-electrical auditors object 415c, so that the second non-electrical auditors object 415c is activated, as shown in FIG. 44 (a). Is opened, and the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 414c. When the second start opening 414c is won, the special map 2 lottery is executed. In the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), a small hit occurs in most cases, so as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the attacker 421 is opened.

  When the attacker 421 is opened, the game ball easily enters the opening / closing winning opening 420, and when the game ball passing through the opening / closing winning opening 420 enters the V winning opening 424, it becomes a V jackpot and shifts to the V jackpot gaming state. To do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7A, there is a case where the big hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and when the big hit is won, the big hit game state is entered. In this embodiment, comparing the big hit game state by the special figure 2 lottery and the V big hit game state, the first round is different, and the same game is executed thereafter.

  In the case of a big hit or V big hit from the special figure 2 lottery, after the big hit game is over, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), a normal game state, a first short time gaming state or a second short time gaming state is played. The state shifts. The games in the normal gaming state and the second shortened gaming state are as described above.

  In the first short time gaming state, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), since the winning probability of the normal symbol game is 100%, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416, the normal electric accessory 415a is always generated. open. For this reason, the right hitting is continuously performed to allow the game ball to pass through the ball passing detector 416. When the ordinary electric accessory 415a opens and captures the game ball, the game ball activates the first non-electric accessory 415b to open the first non-electric accessory 415b as shown in FIG. 45. It is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the first starting port 414b. When the first starting opening 414b is won, the special map 1 lottery is executed. In the special figure 1 lottery, as described above, since the small hit winning probability is 0, it does not result in a V big hit. When the big hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the game state shifts to the big hit game state. The first short time gaming state is less likely to be a V big hit than the second short time gaming state, but the ordinary electric auditors product 415a is easier to open than the normal gaming state, and based on that, the special per unit time is increased. Since the number of times of lottery in FIG. 1 increases, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and is more disadvantageous than the second time saving gaming state.

  In this way, after the jackpot gaming state is over, if the game shifts to the second short time gaming state, the second short time gaming state and the big jackpot gaming state are more likely to occur repeatedly, so that the player receives many prizes. You can expect a sphere. Further, in the second short time gaming state, when the big hit or V big hit occurs and the second short time gaming state is not reached after the big hit game state ends, as shown in FIG. 7C, the normal gaming state and the first short time gaming state Move to any of. When the player shifts to the 1st time shortening game state, the player can aim for the next big hit by the special map 1 lottery without reducing the number of balls, so in the special map 2 lottery, it shifts to the second time shortening game state. Even if it is a lottery result, by shifting to the 1st shortening game state, if it does not shift to the 2nd shortening game state, it always shifts to the normal gaming state Compared to the conventional 1 type 2 type mixer It is possible to increase the degree of expectation and interest in the case where the second short time game state is not won.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol game during the big hit (small hit) game is set to zero. For this reason, the normal electric accessory 415a is not driven during the big hit (small hit) game. Therefore, in the big hit game state, it is difficult to open the first non-electric accessory 415b or the second non-electric accessory 415c.

  Even if the game ball remains in the second passage 505 at the time of shifting to the big hit (small hit) game state, even if the second non-electric auditor 415c is opened immediately after the attacker 421 is opened, the attacker 421 becomes the first hit. Since the second non-electrical accessory 415c is arranged in the vicinity of the second non-electrical accessory 415c, the game ball enters the second non-electrical accessory 415c immediately after the attacker 421 is closed. It becomes a state. Therefore, after the big hit (small hit) game state ends, the second non-electric accessory 415c does not open. Furthermore, because there is no hold in special figure 2, when passing during the big hit, the change of special figure 2 due to that is not done, it is possible to prevent winning the small hit other than the second short time game state.

  According to the present embodiment configured as described above, when the second short time gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, ends, the player's motivation to continue the game remarkably decreases, and after the 15th round game ends. , The instant game may be ended. However, when the second short-time gaming state ends due to a big hit, there is a case where 100 times can be saved (in the case of 15R hour-short one big hit), so at least 100 fluctuations of Toku-zu 1 are completed. You will continue to play games. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to continue the game due to the end of the second short time gaming state. Further, since the player will play the game with the same gaming machine for a long time, more gaming machines can be put into operation in the gaming arcade side. Thus, it is also advantageous for the game arcade side.

  According to the present embodiment, when the special symbol 2 start opening is won, the special symbol display device 431 variably displays only when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, if all the reserved balls due to the special figure 1 starting mouth winning are not exhausted, the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the special figure 2 starting mouth winning is not executed. For this reason, when the short-time gaming state is transitioned from the normal gaming state to the short-time gaming state after completion, if there is a reserved ball due to the special figure 1 starting mouth winning, the special number 1 which is disadvantageous to the player for the reserved number. A lottery will be held.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the big hit notification effect in the normal game state, the pre-reading effect (for example, hold ball effect, zone effect, etc.) is set in many cases of the big hit. As a result, the player can stop the firing of the game balls and prevent the number of holding balls from increasing when the look-ahead effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first special game state, that is, the big hit game state or the V big hit game state, is a 15 round big hit, but is not limited to this, and a time saving game state after digesting 2 rounds in a short time. Alternatively, it may be a so-called sudden shortening of time (abbreviated as a collision).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit by the special figure 1 lottery is 0, but as described above, there is a possibility of winning the small hit in both the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. At that time, the winning probability of the small hit in either one of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery may be 0.
In addition, when there is a small hit by special drawing 1 lottery, the distribution of the game state after the end of the big hit game state by the V big hit via the small hit of the first special symbol game, and the big hit and the second special of the second special symbol game It may be the same as the distribution of the game state after the big hit game state is ended by the V big hit via the small hit of the symbol game, and may be moved to the normal game state, the first short time gaming state or the second short time gaming state with the same probability. .

[Modification 1]
Next, a modified example 1 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the first modification, the specifications of the second opening pattern group shown in FIG. 7E and the opening patterns C and D of FIG. The opening patterns E and F shown in FIG. 47 are changed. Moreover, according to the first modification, the normal electric auditors product 415a opens and closes based on an opening pattern E described later in the first short time gaming state. In addition, in the first modification, some processing is added to the processing by the sub control circuit 200 according to the present embodiment described above. Others are the same as in the present embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 shows a modification of the distribution table for distributing the open patterns belonging to the second open pattern group. The open pattern E is associated with the random number value of the ordinary symbol 1 to which the random number in the range where the selection rate in the ordinary symbol is 50/100 (for example, 0 to 49 in 0 to 99) is associated, and in the ordinary symbol. The open pattern F is associated with the random number value of the normal symbol 2 to which another random number value (for example, 50 to 99 in 0 to 99) in the range where the selectivity is 50/100 belongs.

[Explanation of opening pattern]
Next, the opening patterns E and F will be described with reference to FIG.
According to the opening pattern E, the normal electric accessory 415a is momentarily opened and closed at the timing when the normal symbol in the normal symbol game is stopped by the hit symbol (T2), and then the closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (T6), and then the predetermined pattern. The time (T7) is opened. In addition, the sum of the time (T2) that is momentarily opened and closed and the time (T6) that is thereafter in the closed state is the flat plate of the ordinary electric accessory 415a from when the launcher 20 launches the game ball. It is set to about the time (T5) until it reaches the member 520. The open state time (T7) is set to be slightly shorter than the closed state time (T6) immediately before it.

  The distribution device 506 switches the path of the game ball to the side of the second non-electric accessory 415c immediately at the timing when the normal symbol hits and stops at the symbol, that is, at the same timing as the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 415a ( After the lapse of time T2), the first non-electric accessory 415b is switched to. Since this switching operation is performed instantaneously at the timing when the normal symbol hits the symbol, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is rarely distributed to the second non-electric accessory 415c side. Then, the distribution device 506 switches to the second non-electrical accessory 415c side again, and switches to the first non-electrical accessory 415b side after the elapse of a predetermined time (T7), that is, immediately before the normal electric accessory 415a opens. That is, in the opening pattern E, the distribution device 506 is switched to the second non-electrical accessory 415c side during the time period in which the ordinary electric auditors role 415a is closed, and the ordinary electric auditors role 415a is in the open period. The distribution device 506 is switched to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. For this reason, the game ball shot at the timing when the normal symbol hits and stops at the symbol is captured by the normal electric accessory 415a, and the possibility of moving to the first non-electric accessory 415b increases.

  According to the opening pattern F, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 415a in the opening pattern E is partially different. That is, in the opening pattern F, the normal electric auditors product 415a is opened during a predetermined time (T7) when the distribution device 506 in the opening pattern E is switched from the first non-electric auditors product 415b side to the second non-electrical auditors product 415c side. .. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined time (T8), the ordinary electric accessory 415a is opened again for the predetermined time (T7). Other than that, the open pattern F is the same as the open pattern E.

  In other words, in the opening pattern F, the game ball shot at the timing when the normal symbol game hits is highly likely to be captured by the normal electric accessory 415a and move to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. However, the game ball shot when the normal symbol is changing is highly likely to be captured by the normal electric accessory 415a and move to the second non-electric accessory 415c side.

[Normal symbol production start command reception process]
A subroutine (normal symbol effect start command reception process) executed in step S1055 of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1061, the variable display setting of the normal symbol for effect is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a variable display mode from the start to the change of the normal symbol for effect. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1062. Specifically, the normal symbol for production consists of two-digit numbers from 00 to 99, and during the variable display of the ordinary symbol for production, the second-digit number is stopped and displayed early at the start of the variable display. The digit of the digit becomes the variable display state. When the sub control circuit 200 receives the normal symbol stop command from the main control circuit 100, the first digit is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol game is displayed. In the modified example 1, when the normal symbol game is a hit, it is stopped and displayed as a doublet. Further, in the case where the normal symbol game is a hit, when the open pattern F is selected as the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 415a, it is stopped and displayed with an odd number of double stitches, and when another open pattern is selected. Is stopped and displayed with an even doublet. Therefore, the player can predict which of the first non-electrical accessory 415b and the second non-electrical accessory 415c will be opened by confirming the stop display mode of the second digit.

  In step S1062, a process of determining whether or not it is the open pattern E is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the opening pattern E is selected as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 415a, and when determining that the opening pattern E is selected, moves the processing to step S1063, If it is not determined that the open pattern E has been selected, the process moves to step S1064.

  In step S1063, a firing timing notification setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the time zone of various effects executed within the time of the opening pattern E and setting the effect content to be executed in the time period. .. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

  In step S1064, a process of determining whether or not it is the open pattern F is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the opening pattern E is selected as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors role 415a, and when determining that the opening pattern F is selected, moves the processing to step S1065, If it is not determined that the open pattern F has been selected, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S1065, a firing timing notification setting process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the same process as step S1063. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Launch timing notification setting process]
The subroutine (effect control process) executed in steps S1063 and S1065 of FIG. 48 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1071, the sub CPU 201 calculates a required game ball launch time zone. The required game ball launch time zone corresponds to a time zone in which the shot game ball passes through the second passage 505. In this processing, the sub CPU 201, the timing at which the normal electric auditors role 415a is opened, the time when the distribution device 506 switches to the second passage 505 side, and the game ball after the game ball is shot to the distribution device 506. Based on the time to reach, normally performs the process of calculating the required game ball launch time zone based on the time when the symbol stopped. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1072.

  In step S1072, the notification effect setting for the required time zone for game ball firing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets, in the work RAM 203, data for navigation display (see the navigation display 56 in FIG. 51) in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 so as to shoot the game ball during the game ball launching required time zone. To do. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1073.

  In step S1073, the game ball emission stop time zone is calculated. The game ball emission stop time zone corresponds to a time zone in which the fired game ball passes through the first passage 504. In this process, the sub CPU 201, the timing when the normal electric auditors role 415a is opened, the time when the distribution device 506 is switched to the first passage 504 side, and the game ball after the game ball is shot to the distribution device 506. Based on the time to reach, usually performs the process of calculating the game ball launch stop time zone based on the time when the symbol stopped. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1074.

  In step S1074, the notification effect setting of the game ball emission stop time zone is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201, in the work RAM 203, data for navigation display (see the navigation display 56 in FIG. 51) in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 so as to stop the game ball emission during the game ball emission stop time period. Set to. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1075.

  In step S1075, the player participation effect time zone for performing the player participation effect using the touch sensor 450 is calculated. In this process, the sub CPU 201, the timing when the normal electric auditors role 415a is opened, the time when the distribution device 506 switches to the first passage side, and the game ball that has reached the distribution device 506 after the game ball has been shot. Based on the time until it is played and the time interval at which the game ball is fired, a process for calculating the player participation effect time zone based on the time when the normal symbol is stopped is performed. The player participation effect time zone is set to be slightly longer than the game ball firing stop time zone. That is, it is set to be longer by a time period in which a game ball that has already been launched does not pass through the first passage 504 when the display prompting the operation of the touch sensor 450 (see the touch sensor guide display 57 in FIG. 51) is displayed. To be done. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Production control processing]
The subroutine (effect control process) executed in step S1014 of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1081, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is within the player participation effect time zone. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is within the player participation effect time zone, the process proceeds to step S1082. When it is not determined that it is within the player participation effect time zone, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1082, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor 450 is operated. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the touch sensor 450 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S1083. If it is not determined that the touch sensor 450 is operated, the process proceeds to step S1085.

  In step S1083, an effect based on the operation of the touch sensor 450 is executed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 provides the work RAM 203 with data for displaying a predetermined effect image (see the game effect display 58 shown in FIG. 51) in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the operation time of the touch sensor 450. Set to. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1084.

  In step S1084, a process of adding points is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a point value for effect according to the operation of the touch sensor 450 and adding this point value to the point value already stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1085.

  In step S1085, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the point value exceeds a preset reference value. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the preset reference value has been exceeded, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1086. If it is not determined that the preset reference value is exceeded, the process moves to step S1088.

  In step S1086, an effect based on the point value exceeding the reference value is executed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets, in the work RAM 203, data for executing a predetermined effect based on the point value exceeding the reference value. As the predetermined effect, for example, a menu screen for switching music by the operation of the effect button 16 by the player is displayed, a QR code (registered trademark) for obtaining a predetermined privilege is displayed, or based on the acquired point value. Displaying the game evaluation may be mentioned. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1087.

  In step S1087, the point value is reset. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing “0” in the storage area of the work RAM 203 that stores the point value. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1088.

  In step S1088, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect processing. For example, when the main CPU 101 drives the normal electric accessory 415a and the distribution device 506 in the opening pattern E or the opening pattern F, the sub CPU 201 causes the game ball launching essential time period and the game ball launching stop time period to be: A process of storing data for displaying an image for prompting the launch of the game ball or an image for prompting the stop of the launch of the game ball (navi display 56 in FIG. 51) in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Explanation of performance screen]
An example of the effect screen displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 and 52 show the transition of the display screen in the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50, and the special symbol for production 53 for deriving and displaying the result of the special symbol game, a normal symbol Only the normal symbol 54 for the effect for deriving and displaying the result of the game, the reserved ball number display 55, the navigation display 56, the touch sensor guide display 57, and the game effect display 58 are shown. The number of reserved balls 55 indicates a reserved ball based on winning in the central starting port 414a and the first starting port 414b, and a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed. The navigation display 56 shows the player the firing timing of the game ball. Here, the navigation display 56 is displayed in the case of the second short time gaming state. In other words, when the navigation display 56 is displayed, the player can determine that the current gaming state is the second short time gaming state. The touch sensor guide display 57 shows the timing of operating the touch sensor 450. Here, the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed at the time when the shot game ball enters the first starting opening 414b. The game effect display 58 is displayed by operating the touch sensor 450.

  Further, FIG. 51 is a hit in the normal symbol game in the second short time gaming state, is an example of a display screen when the open pattern F is selected, and FIG. 52 is a normal symbol game in the second short time gaming state. Is an example of a display screen when the open pattern E is selected.

  FIG. 51 (a) shows a display mode at the start of variation of the normal symbol 54. Ordinary pattern 54 consists of two-digit number, and the first digit and the second digit of the number are independently displayed as a variable display state when the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 10) detects a game ball. Become.

  FIG. 51 (b) shows a display mode immediately after the start of variation of the normal symbol 54. Immediately after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is stopped and displayed, and the navigation display 56 for urging the player to hit the right symbol is displayed in the display area 51. In the modified example 1, the stop display mode of the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is an odd number (for example, “3”), and the character information “continue right-handed” is displayed in the display area 51 as the navigation display 56. The player who sees this display can know in advance that the second non-electric accessory 415c may open by continuing the right stroke.

  FIG. 51 (c) shows a display mode before the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol 54. Normally, the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed before the fluctuation of the symbol 54 is stopped, that is, before the shot game ball is distributed to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. Here, as the touch sensor guide display 57, character information "Hold your right hand over!" Is displayed. The player who sees the touch sensor guide display 57 can know that the timing to stop the firing of the game ball is near.

  FIG. 51 (d) shows a display mode immediately before the stop of fluctuation of the normal symbol 54. At this point, the navigation display 56 is switched from "continue right-handed" to character information "stop firing". When the player stops the firing of the game ball according to the navigation display 56 immediately after the navigation display 56 is displayed, it is possible to avoid the opening of the first non-electric accessory 415b. The player can stop the firing of the game ball by pressing a stop button (not shown) that stops the firing of the game ball or by releasing the hand from the firing handle.

  Further, while the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the game effect display 58 is displayed by the player holding the right hand over the touch sensor 450. In the game effect display 58, additional points such as “+5” and “+10” are displayed, and the more the right hand is held over the touch sensor 450, the more points can be acquired. The time when the game effect display 58 is displayed is set to the time when the shot game ball wins the first starting opening 414b. That is, even if the player does not notice that the navigation display 56 is switched from "continue right-handed" to "stop firing", at the time when the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the player can make a right hand movement according to the displayed contents. When is touched over the touch sensor 450, the player has released his hand from the firing handle, and thus the firing of the game ball is stopped. Moreover, when the player holds the game ball for a long time so that the player can reach the maximum points, the game ball will stop firing at the time when the shot game ball hits the first starting port 414b. It is possible to avoid winning the prize 414b.

  It should be noted that the player appropriately selects whether or not the shooting of the game ball is stopped. For example, when it is desired to pull the big hit quickly regardless of the advantage or disadvantage after the big hit game, such as when the closing time of the game hall is close, it is possible to continue the right hit.

  FIG. 51 (e) shows the display mode at the time when the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. At this point, the stopped display mode of the first digit symbol which has been changed becomes "3", and the normal symbol 54 has the same flat pattern of "3".

  FIG. 51 (f) shows the display mode at the time when the normal electric accessory 415a has finished driving by a series of opening / closing patterns after the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. After the variation of the normal symbol 54 stops, even if the game ball is shot, the game ball is no longer likely to be sent to the first actuation mechanism 511 from the normal electric accessory 415a. The touch sensor guide display 57 disappears from the screen, and the game effect display 58 displays the point acquired by the operation of the touch sensor 450, for example, the character information “100pt acquisition”. The player who sees this display can know the timing to restart the right-handed stroke.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows a display mode at the start of variation of the normal symbol 54. When the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 10) detects a game ball, the normal symbol 54 is in a variable display state.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a display mode immediately after the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol 54. Immediately after the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is stopped and displayed. In the modified example 1, the stop display mode of the second digit of the normal symbol 54 is an even number (for example, “4”). The player who sees this display can know in advance that the first non-electric accessory 415b may be opened by continuing the right stroke.

  FIG. 52 (c) shows a display mode before the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol 54. Normally, the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed before the fluctuation of the symbol 54 is stopped, that is, before the shot game ball is distributed to the first non-electric accessory 415b side. Here, as the touch sensor guide display 57, character information "Hold your right hand over!" Is displayed. The player who sees the touch sensor guide display 57 can know that the timing to stop the firing of the game ball is near. At this point, in FIG. 51 (c), the navigation display 56 of "continue right-handed stroke" is displayed, but it is not displayed in FIG. 52 (c). This is because, in the time saving game state, basic right-handing is performed, and since the second non-electric accessory 415c is unlikely to be in the open state, it is not necessary to display "continue right-handing". In this way, the electric accessory is driven by a plurality of drive patterns (opening patterns E and F), so that it is possible to give a variety of effects for notifying the timing of launching the game ball.

  FIG. 52D shows the display mode immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54. At this point, the navigation display 56 consisting of the text information "stop firing" is displayed. When the player stops the firing of the game ball according to the navigation display 56 immediately after the navigation display 56 is displayed, it is possible to avoid the opening of the first non-electric accessory 415b. The player can stop the firing of the game ball by pressing a stop button (not shown) that stops the firing of the game ball or by releasing the hand from the firing handle.

  In addition, the firing of the game ball is stopped. While the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, the game effect display 58 is displayed when the player holds his right hand over the touch sensor 450. In the game effect display 58, additional points such as “+5” and “+10” are displayed, and the more the right hand is held over the touch sensor 450, the more points can be acquired. The time when the game effect display 58 is displayed is set to the time when the shot game ball wins the first starting opening 414b. That is, even if the player does not notice the navigation display 56 “stop firing”, when the player holds his right hand over the touch sensor 450 according to the display contents at the time when the touch sensor guide display 57 is displayed, Since the player has released his hand from the firing handle, the firing of the game ball is stopped. Moreover, when the player holds the game ball for a long time so that the player can reach the maximum points, the game ball will stop firing at the time when the shot game ball hits the first starting port 414b. It is possible to avoid winning the prize 414b.

  FIG. 52 (e) shows a display mode at the time when the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. At this point, the stop display mode of the first-digit symbol that has been changed is "4", and the normal symbol 54 has the same alignment of "4".

  FIG. 52 (f) shows a display mode at the time when the normal electric accessory 415a has finished driving by a series of opening / closing patterns after the fluctuation of the normal symbol 54 is stopped. After the variation of the normal symbol 54 stops, even if the game ball is shot, the game ball is no longer likely to be sent to the first actuation mechanism 511 from the normal electric accessory 415a. The touch sensor guide display 57 disappears from the screen, and the game effect display 58 displays the point acquired by the operation of the touch sensor 450, for example, the character information “100pt acquisition”. The player who sees this display can know the timing to restart the right-handed stroke.

  By the way, after the big hit game state, the game state shifts to one of the normal game state, the first short time gaming state, and the second short time gaming state, but the second short time gaming state in which V hit may occur. Is advantageous to the player. In addition, the probability of shifting to the second short time gaming state is higher in the special figure 2 lottery with the second non-electric auditors product 415c winning than in the special figure 1 lottery with the first non-electric winning combination 415b. From this, when the opening pattern F is selected, by following the navigation display 56, it is possible to avoid opening the first non-electric accessory 415b, so that the second short time gaming state that is advantageous for the player is set. It becomes possible to maintain.

  According to the modified example 1 thus configured, the player switches between the game ball launch and the game ball launch stop according to the navigation display 56, or operates the touch sensor 450 according to the touch sensor guide display 57. It is possible to increase the chances of opening the second non-electrical accessory 415c and avoid opening the first non-electrical accessory 415b. In the case where the open pattern F shown in FIG. 51 is selected, it is confirmed that the game ball has been captured by the ordinary electric auditors product 415a while the navigation display 56 of "continue right hitting" is displayed. At that point, the firing of the game ball is stopped. Then, after confirming that the second non-electric accessory 415c has been opened and the navigation display 56 "Restart launch", the launch of the game ball may be restarted.

  Further, in the modified example 1, the navigation display 56 and the touch sensor guide display 57 both stop firing of the game ball during the game ball firing stop time period in order to avoid opening of the first non-electric accessory 415b. This is to notify the timing to be performed. Therefore, only one of the navigation display 56 and the touch sensor guide display 57 may be displayed. However, some players do not operate the effect button 16 or the touch sensor 450, so it is desirable to display at least the navigation display 56. Further, since the navigation display 56 is not to be played by the player and may be inappropriate when viewed from the hall side, in that case, only the touch sensor guide display 57 may be displayed.

  In addition, in Modification 1 described above, the special map 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special map 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning the V prize is higher than that of the special map 1 lottery. If the 2 lottery has an advantage over the special drawing 1 lottery, the modified example 1 can be applied. For example, the big-hit game triggered by the special figure 2 lottery is a V-probable variation machine in which the number of rounds is larger than that of the big-hit game triggered by the special figure 1 lottery, the shutter 417 or the attacker 421 in the round game is open for a long time. In addition, the big hit game triggered by the special map 2 lottery is easier to win in the V winning opening than the big hit game triggered by the special map 1 lottery. f), as shown in FIG. 52 (f), it is easy to obtain points for giving some privilege to the player, the selection range of back music during the big hit game is large, and the premiere effect is easily produced. Be done.

  Further, in the modified example 1 described above, the navigation display 56 is displayed in the case of the second short time gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first short time gaming state, the sorting device 506 displays the first time. The navigation display 56 may be displayed to notify the timing at which the distribution device 506 distributes to the second passage 505, including an opening pattern having a slight time for distribution to the two passages 505. As a result, even in the first short time gaming state, it is possible to give a chance of a big V jackpot, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 2]
Next, a modified example 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
Modification 2 is a modification of the jackpot distribution specification shown in FIG. 7C in the above-described embodiment to the jackpot distribution specification shown in FIG. Others are the same as in the present embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 shows an example of the big hit distribution table. In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot win and a V jackpot by a special symbol game, the jackpot is a 15 round regular jackpot, a 15 round hour short A jackpot, a 15 round hour short B jackpot, a 15 round hour short C jackpot, a 15 round hour short D jackpot. It is distributed to either of. Here, the 15-round normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games is 15 and which does not become a time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The 15-round short-time short A big hit is a big hit in which the number of round games is 15, and the first short-time short game state is played up to 100 times of variation after the end of the big hit game state. 15 round hour short B big hit, the number of round games is 15 times, after the big hit game state ends, the number of fluctuations 1 to 20 times the second hour short game state, 21 to 100 times the first hour short game state It's a big hit. The 15 rounds short time C big hit means that the number of round games is 15, and after the end of the big hit game state, the second short time gaming state is changed from 1 to 50 times and the first short time gaming state is changed to 51 to 100 times. It's a big hit. The 15-round short-time short D big hit is a big hit in which the number of round games is 15 and the second short-time short game state is played up to 100 times of variation after the end of the big hit game state.

  In the processing of step S218 shown in FIG. 24, the distribution of the above-mentioned time saving contents sets the number of fluctuations to be the second time saving game state and the number of fluctuations to be the first time saving game state. Then, in the processing of step S225 shown in FIG. 25, the main CPU 101 counts the number of fluctuations to be the second short time gaming state and the number of fluctuations to be the first short time gaming state, and when the total is 100 times. , The game state is shifted to the normal game state.

  The distribution of the time saving contents described above is merely an example, and other distribution may be performed. For example, a 15 round hour short A big hit is a big jackpot with 15 round games and a variation of 100 times in the second hour short game state, a 15 round hour short B jackpot, a 15 round hour short C jackpot, and a 15 round hour short D jackpot. In order, the number of times of change to the second short time gaming state may be lowered.

  In the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round regular jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round hour short A jackpot is 0/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round hour short B jackpot is 25. / 100, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round short-time C big hit is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round short-time C big hit is 10/100.

  In the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round normal jackpot is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round hour short A jackpot is 15/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round hour short B jackpot is 0. / 100, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round short-time C big hit is 0/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round short-time C big hit is 65/100. In other words, the time saving game state in the present embodiment is a special time shift from the second time saving game state that is advantageous to the player to the first time saving game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state but disadvantageous than the second time saving game state. It is in a game state. Further, in the time saving game state in the present embodiment, the time saving number in the first time saving game state is 0 times, the time saving time in the second time saving game state is 100 times, and the time saving time in the second time saving game state is 100 times. The case where either the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state is 0 times is also included, as in the case where the time saving number of the time saving game state is 0 times.

  In the second modification, a big hit from the normal game state causes the second short time game state advantageous to the player at least the first 20 times with a 50% probability after the big hit game state ends. When the special figure 2 big hit or V big hit in the second short time gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second short time gaming state is up to 100 times of variation after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, the big hit game state and the second short time gaming state are repeated, and as a result, the player is more likely to win many prize balls.

  By the way, conventionally, when a small hit is won by the special drawing 2 lottery, the attacker 421 is opened, but at this time, a game ball is intentionally shot at a timing when the V prize is not won, and the game ball is hit into the attacker 421 to open and close. Some players repeatedly pass a game ball through the winning opening 420, obtain a small number of prize balls many times, and as a result, hit the ball to increase the number of balls (so-called V removal). Specifically, it is possible to hit V in the first 50 times in the time saving game state and aim for V prize in the remaining 50 times.

However, in the modified example 2, the attacker 421 is closed when one game ball enters the opening / closing winning port 420, and therefore there is little merit of removing V. Even if the specification is such that the attacker 421 closes when several game balls enter, if the second short time gaming state that is easy to win a small hit does not occur in the latter half of the 100th short time gaming Therefore, performing V removal misses the opportunity to easily win V. Therefore, in Modified Example 2, it becomes difficult to remove V, and it is possible to ensure fairness of the game.
In the modification 2 described above, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special figure 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning the V is higher than the special figure 1 lottery. If the 2 lottery has an advantage over the special drawing 1 lottery, the modified example 2 can be applied. As a specific example, the contents described in Modification 1 can be mentioned.

[Modification 3]
Next, a modified example 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In modification 3, the specification of the big hit distribution shown in FIG. 7C in the above-described embodiment is changed to the big hit distribution specification shown in FIG. 54. Others are almost the same as those of the present embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 shows an example of a big hit distribution table. In the modified example 3, the big hit is distributed in consideration of which of the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state.

  In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds of regular jackpots is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds of 1 hour saving / hits is 100/100, The probability of being distributed to two big wins in 15 rounds is 20/100.

  In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the 1st time saving game state, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds saving 1 jackpot is 10/100, and 15 rounds saving time The probability of being distributed to two big hits is 40/100.

  In the jackpot of the first special symbol game in the second shortening game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds normal jackpot is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds shortening 1 jackpot is 0/100, and the 15 rounds saving The probability of being distributed to two big hits is 50/100.

  That is, in the big hit of the first special symbol game, the time saving game state is easier to shift to the second time saving game state, which is advantageous to the player, than the normal game state (non-time saving state).

  Further, in the jackpot and V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds of the regular jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds of the saving time 1 jackpot is 0. / 100, and the probability of being distributed to two big wins in 15 rounds is 50/100. In addition, it is extremely rare that the second special symbol game is executed in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state).

  In the big jackpot and the V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the 1st time saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15th round regular big jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15th round shorter working hour big jackpot is 0/100, There is a 50/100 chance of being distributed to two big wins in 15 rounds. Note that the second special symbol game is rarely executed in the first time shortening game state, but for example, in the opening pattern B shown in FIG. 8, the flat plate member 520 of the ordinary electric auditors product 415a projects for the third time. When a game ball rides on the flat plate member 520, the second non-electric accessory 415c may open.

  In the jackpot and V jackpot of the second special symbol game in the second time saving game state, the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds normal jackpot is 50/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds hour saving 1 jackpot is 0/100, There is a 50/100 chance of being distributed to two big wins in 15 rounds. As described above, the jackpot distribution shown in the table of FIG. 54 is executed after the special game state is completed, which is executed by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area (central starting opening 414a) of the second area (left-handed area). The game state shifts to the normal state in the game state and the game state after the end of the special game state executed by the passage of the game medium in the first start area (first start opening 414b) of the first area (the right-handed area). The probability is the same, the game state after the end of the special game state executed with the passage of the game medium in the first start region (central start port 414a) of the second region, and the first start region of the first region (first The probability of shifting to the second specific state (second short time gaming state) in the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state executed with the passage of the game medium through the first starting opening 414b) is the first starting region of the first region. (First start The game medium passage 414b) is better to triggered as an example of a high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the special winning opening display command) executed in step S1053 of FIG. 42 in Modification 3 will be described.

  In step S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a round for notifying the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is ended, and when it is determined that it is the notifying round, the process is moved to step S1092. If it is not determined to be the notification round, the process moves to step S1097.

  In step S1092, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the big hit that is currently being executed is 15 rounds / hours 2 and, if it is determined to be 15 rounds / hours 2, shifts the processing to step S1093. If it is not determined that the time is 2 rounds of 15 hours, the process proceeds to step S1094.

  In step S1093, an effect for notifying that the second short time gaming state is to be set is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing, in the work RAM 203, effect data for informing that the second short time gaming state will be entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1097.

  In step S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot that is currently being executed is 15 rounds / hours / shortness 1, and if it is determined to be 15 rounds / hours / shortness 1, moves the processing to step S1095. If it is not determined that the time is 15 rounds of 2 hours, the process proceeds to step S1096.

  In step S1095, an effect for notifying the shift to the first short time gaming state is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing, in the work RAM 203, data of an effect for notifying that the first short time gaming state will be entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1097.

  In step S1096, an effect for notifying the shift to the normal game state is set. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing, in the work RAM 203, data of an effect for notifying that the game state will shift to the normal game state after the jackpot game state is over. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1097.

  Then, by the process of step S1015 of FIG. 38, based on the effect data stored in the work RAM 203, an effect image for notifying the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

  In step S1097, other processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting various effects to be executed in the round game. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Explanation of performance screen]
An example of the effect screen displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 and 57 show only the game effect display 58 for notifying the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state and the round game number display 59. The game effect display 58 includes an ally character 58a, an enemy character 58b, and character information. The ally character 58a and the enemy character 58b fight with each other, and as a result, the game state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Notify the player.

  In Modification 3, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game effect display 58 is displayed in 10th to 12th rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the teammate character 58a and the enemy character 58b are displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 in the tenth round, and the battle effect screen is displayed in the eleventh round. Then, the results are displayed in the 12th round. If the result of the battle is a victory as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the game shifts to the second short time gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of a draw as shown in FIG. 57 (b), after the jackpot game state is over, the first hour shortening game state is entered. In the case of losing as shown in FIG. 57 (c), it shifts to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Further, the enemy character 58b may be a strong enemy as shown in FIG. 56 (a) or a weak enemy as shown in FIG. 56 (b), and appears according to the game state after the jackpot game state ends. The probability is preset.

  FIG. 58 is a table showing a distribution pattern of enemies in a big hit. There are six distribution patterns: victory against weak enemy, draw against weak enemy, defeat weak enemy, win against strong enemy, draw against strong enemy, lose to strong enemy. In the case of 15 rounds of normal jackpot, the defeat of the weak enemy is selected with a probability of 1/100, the defeat of the strong enemy is selected with a probability of 99/100, and the others are not selected. In the case of 15 rounds of one hour short win, a draw is selected with a probability of 20/100 for a weak enemy, a draw of 80/100 is selected for a strong enemy, and the others are not selected. In the case of 15 rounds and 2 short wins, a victory is selected with a probability of 95/100 to a weak enemy, a victory is selected with a probability of 5/100 to a strong enemy, and the others are not selected.

  That is, if the enemy character 58b is a weak enemy, at least the possibility of shifting to the normal game state is considerably low, and if the enemy character 58b is a strong enemy, the player is unlikely to expect to shift to the second shorter playing time state. Will be informed.

According to the modified example 3 configured in this way, as compared with the present embodiment, a big hit from the normal gaming state has a lower probability of shifting to the second shorter time gaming state, but shifts to the first shorter time gaming state. there is a possibility. Further, in the big hit from the first time saving game state, the probability of shifting to the second time saving game state is higher than that from the normal gaming state, and the probability of moving to the first time shortening gaming state is higher than that of the normal game state. Although it is lower than the jackpot, there is still a possibility of shifting to the first short time gaming state. Thereby, for example, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit in the first short time gaming state, it was not possible to shift to the first short time gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, but according to the modified example 3. For example, in the case of a big hit in the first short time gaming state, there may be a case where the big hit game state ends and the state may shift to the first short time gaming state. That is, it becomes possible to repeat the first short time gaming state, and it becomes possible for the player to have various expectations for the transition of the gaming state after the big hit game.
In addition, in the modified example 3 described above, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special figure 1 lottery in that the possibility of winning the V is higher than the special figure 1 lottery. If the 2 lottery has an advantage over the Toku-zu 1 lottery, the modified example 3 can be applied. As a specific example, the contents described in Modification 1 can be mentioned.

[Modification 4]
Next, a modified example 4 of the present embodiment will be described. In Modification 4, a combination of the opening / closing pattern of the movable member 426 and the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421 makes it possible to form a plurality of patterns such as a pattern that is easy to put on the attacker 421 but difficult to win V or a pattern that is hard to reliably win V. And a small hit opening pattern.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine.
FIG. 59 (a) shows an example of a special symbol game specification table. In the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, a big hit probability, a small hit probability, the number of pending, general prize hole 419a ~ 419c award ball, the upper limit of the count number of the opening and closing prize hole count sensor 120, a big prize hole count sensor Since the upper limit of the count number of 113 is the same as that of the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows an example of a normal symbol game specification table. In the normal symbol game, there are cases of a normal game state (non-time saving state), a first time saving game state, and a second time saving game state.

  In the normal gaming state, the winning probability is set to 0 and the number of holdings is set to 4. In the first short time gaming state, the winning probability is set to 250/251 and the number of holdings is set to 4. The number of hours saved is set to 5 times. In the second short time gaming state, the winning probability is set to 251/251 and the number of holdings is set to four. The number of hours saved is set to 5 times. Note that the number of hours saved is set by the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S218 of FIG.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows an example of a big hit distribution table. In the jackpot of the first special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds of regular jackpots is 50/100, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours and 1 jackpot is 25/100, and the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds / hours and 2 jackpots. Is 25/100. In the jackpot of the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds of regular jackpots is 20/100, the probability of being distributed to 15 rounds of 1-hour shortening is 10/100, the probability of being distributed to 2 rounds of 15-round shortening Is 70/100. In addition, in the case of V win, it is similar to the second special symbol game, the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds normal jackpot is 20/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 15 rounds hour reduction 1 jackpot is 20/100, There is a 70/100 chance of being distributed to two big wins in 15 rounds.

  FIG. 59 (d) shows an example of a distribution table for distributing the small hit opening patterns. In the modified example 4, an opening pattern is set according to a group of special symbols which are small hits. In the first time shortening game state, the open pattern a is selected when the small hit is caused by the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 1, and the open pattern is selected when the small hit is caused by the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 2. b is selected, and the open pattern c is selected when a small hit occurs due to the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 3. In the second short time gaming state, the open pattern c is selected when the small hit due to the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 1 is selected, and the open pattern when the small hit is caused by the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 2 a is selected, and the open pattern c is selected when a small hit occurs due to the special symbol of the group of the small hit symbol 3. The selection ratio of the small hit patterns 1 to 3 is 1: 1: 1.

[Explanation of small hit opening pattern]
Next, the small hit opening patterns a to c will be described with reference to FIG.

  The small hit opening patterns a to c are combinations of an attacker opening pattern that drives the attacker 421 to open / close the opening / closing winning opening 420 and a V winning opening opening pattern to drive the movable member 426 to open / close the V winning opening 424. Become. In the normal state, the attacker 421 and the movable member 426 are closed.

  In the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern a, as shown in FIG. 60, the operation of opening the attacker 421 from the closed state for a predetermined time and then returning it to the closed state is repeated twice. In the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern a, as shown in FIG. 60, the movable member 426 is momentarily opened and closed at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened, and the attacker 421 is opened and closed for the second time. After that, the operation of opening the movable member 426 for a predetermined time and returning it to the closed state is performed. That is, in the small hit opening pattern a, the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened for the second time may win the V winning opening 424.

  In the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b, as shown in FIG. 60, the operation of opening the attacker 421 from the closed state for a predetermined time and then returning it to the closed state is repeated three times in succession. In the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b, as shown in FIG. 60, the movable member 426 is momentarily opened and closed at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened, and the attacker 421 is opened and closed for the first time. The movable member 426 is momentarily opened and closed during the closed state from the execution of the above operation to the second opening. That is, in the small hit opening pattern b, there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened for the first time may win the V winning opening 424, but from the small hit opening pattern a. Is unlikely to win the V winning opening 424.

  As for the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern c, as shown in FIG. 60, the attacker 421 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and this open state is continuously opened and closed three times in the attacker opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b. It is to return to the closed state continuously for the time. In the V winning opening opening pattern of the small hit opening pattern b, as shown in FIG. 60, the movable member 426 is momentarily opened and closed at the timing when the attacker 421 is first opened. At the timing of opening the movable member 426 for the second time in the winning opening pattern, the movable member 426 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and this open state is opened and closed twice continuously in the attacker open pattern of the small hit open pattern b. It is to return to the closed state continuously for the time. That is, in the small hit opening pattern c, if the game ball passes through the opening / closing winning opening 420 when the attacker 421 is opened, the gaming ball wins the V winning opening 424 with a fairly high probability.

  Which of the small hit opening pattern a to the small hit opening pattern c is set is set with reference to the small hit opening pattern table in the process of step S135 of FIG.

  In this way, in the case of the second short time gaming state, the V big hit is likely to occur and the second short time gaming state is likely to occur after the big hit game state ends, so that the second short time gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Next, a game by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Modification 4 will be described.

  In the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting is performed aiming at winning at the central starting opening 414a. Then, when the big hit is triggered by the winning in the central starting opening 414a, after the big hit game is over, the game state is shifted to one of the normal game state, the first short time gaming state and the second short time gaming state.

  In the normal gaming state, the player is left-handed for the purpose of winning the central starting opening 414a. In the case of the first short time gaming state and the second short time gaming state, a right hit is performed aiming at the ball passage detector 416. In addition, in the 1st time saving game state and the 2nd time saving game state, it becomes the time saving game state up to the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol 5 times. Further, in the first short time gaming state and the second short time gaming state, the distribution device 506 distributes the game balls to the second passage 505 side. That is, since the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the change of the special symbol five times, it is a small hit with a high probability. And, in the case of a big jackpot or a special drawing lottery in the change of the special symbol of five times, after the jackpot game is over, a normal game state, a first short time gaming state and a second short time gaming state are played. The state shifts. In the case of not being a big hit by V big hit or special drawing lottery in the change of the special symbol five times, the game state returns to the normal game state.

  According to the modified example 4 configured as described above, the probability of V winning can be changed by the combination of the opening pattern of the movable member 426 and the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421. For this reason, for example, in the present embodiment, the non-electrical role object 415c is configured to be difficult to open in the first short time gaming state, but in Modification 4, the non-electric role in the first short time gaming state. It is possible to make the object 415c easy to open and, instead, to make it difficult to win the V prize. This makes it possible to give the player a chance to win a V prize in the first short time gaming state. Particularly, in the modified example 4, the small hit opening pattern c is selected at a rate of 1/3 in the first short time gaming state, and the small hit opening pattern c is selected at a rate of 2/3 in the second short time gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the V winning in the time saving game of five times.

In the modified example 4 described above, in the case where the V big hit or the big hit by the special drawing lottery does not occur in the change of the special symbol five times, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state, but is not limited thereto. When the distribution device 506 is switched so as to guide the game ball to the first passage 504 side, the special figure 1 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, and the state is shifted to the time saving game state, and when the special figure 1 lottery is not won in the time saving game state. You may return to the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the V jackpot in the first five special symbol variations, and to give the player a predetermined number of times to save even if the V jackpot does not occur.
Further, in the modified example 4 described above, the small hit is won at 299/300 by the special drawing 2 lottery, and the small hit opening pattern is selected according to the small hit design. At that time, in the first short time game state, the selection rate of the open pattern in which it is difficult to win the V is high, and in the second short time game state, the selection rate of the open pattern in which the V is easy to win is high. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a small hit is won by a special drawing 1 lottery with a probability of 1/100, and when the small hit opening pattern is selected, the same small hit opening pattern as that in the first short time gaming state is selected. It can also be a rate. At this time, the selected small hit opening pattern may be a pattern in which it is easy to win V or a pattern in which it is difficult to win V.

Also, the small hit opening pattern is not limited to the small hit opening patterns a to c described above, and other opening patterns may be selectable.
The opening / closing pattern of the movable member 326 may be a fixed pattern regardless of the small hitting pattern. In this case, the winning rate to the V winning opening 424 changes depending on the opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421. Therefore, as an opening / closing pattern of the attacker 421, a pattern in which it is in the open state for a long time is difficult to win in the V winning opening 424, and a pattern in which the open state is short but the game ball passes through the attacker 421 has a high probability of V. It is possible to create a pattern for winning the winning opening 424.

  Further, according to the modified example 4, in the first short time gaming state and the second short time gaming state, the game balls both move to the second starting port 414c side, so the first starting port 414b is not used in the short time gaming state. It is also possible to Therefore, it is possible to omit the distribution device 506, the first passage 504, the second passage 505, and the non-electric accessory 415b, 415c used in the above-described embodiment.

[Modification 5]
61 to 63 are diagrams showing the main configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 5 is different in part of the configuration of the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
The configuration of the main part of the winning unit 415 in Modification 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. The same members or members having the same functions as the members constituting the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  61: is explanatory drawing which shows schematic structure of the winning unit 415 in the modified example 5, FIG. 61 (a) is a top view of the winning unit 415, FIG. 61 (b) is the opening 40a vicinity formed in the game board 40. 61C is a side view of the winning unit 415. FIG. FIG. 62 is a front view near the flat plate member 520 of the winning unit 415. FIG. 62 is a plan view showing the operation of the winning unit 415. FIG. 63 is a side view showing the operation of the winning unit 415.

  Comparing the winning unit 415 according to the modified example 5 with the winning unit 415 shown in FIG. 5, the configuration of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505, the provision of the link mechanism 522, and the omission of the distribution device 506. Be different.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a substantially rectangular opening 40a is formed on the board surface of the game board 40, and this opening 40a is arranged below the ball passage detector 416 so that the game balls can pass therethrough. It is formed in a substantially rectangular shape of various sizes. The length of the opening 40a in the vertical direction is set to be slightly longer than the sum of the diameter of the game ball and the length of the horizontal direction is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. The flat plate member 520 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having a lateral width slightly shorter than the lateral length of the opening 40a, and is installed so as to be projectable and retractable with respect to the opening 40a. The tip end of the flat plate member 520 in the state of being drawn into the opening 40a faces the lower portion inside the opening 40a, and the tip end portion of the flat plate member 520 is opened from the opening 40a according to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111. The board surface of 40 is projected and retracted. Further, the upper surface of the tip end portion of the flat plate member 520 is gently inclined downward from the tip end toward the back side, and the game ball riding on the tip end portion of the flat plate member 520 is easily moved to the opening 40a side. ..

  The second passage 505 of the modified example 5 is made of a substantially rectangular tube-shaped member, and the tip end portion is arranged at the edge portion on the back surface side of the game board 40 on the lower end side of the opening 40a. At the tip of the second passage 505 of the modified example 5, a second passage entrance 505a that is open vertically upward is formed.

  The first passage 504 of the modified example 5 is made of a substantially rectangular tube-shaped member and is arranged in parallel so that the tip end portion is in close contact with the second passage 505 on the back surface side of the game board 40. At the tip of the first passage 504 of the modified example 5, a first passage entrance 504a that is open vertically upward is formed. On the back surface side of the game board 40, the first passage entrance 504a is arranged on the back side, the second passage entrance 505a is arranged on the front side, and the front end surface of the first passage entrance 504a and the second passage entrance 504a are arranged. The tip end surface of the ball mouth 505a is formed flush.

  The flat plate member 520 is arranged above the first passage entrance 504a and is slidable along the first passage entrance 504a and the second passage entrance 505a.

  Further, the length of the flat plate member 520 in the longitudinal direction is set such that the rear end of the flat plate member 520 is arranged near the back surface of the game board 40 in a state where the front end portion of the flat plate member 520 projects from the opening 40a. There is. Further, the second passage entrance 505a is arranged at a position that is opened when the flat plate member 520 is projected and closed when the flat plate member 520 is pulled in.

  The link mechanism 522 transmits the operation of the solenoid iron core of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 to the flat plate member 520 to slide the flat plate member 520 with a constant stroke. That is, when the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 operates to cause the tip of the flat plate member 520 to project from the opening 40a, both the first passage entrance 504a and the second passage entrance 505a are opened. At the same time, a game ball rolling on the board surface of the game board 40 can be captured. When the normal electric accessory solenoid 111 switches the operation and pulls the front end of the flat plate member 520 through the opening 40a, the rear end of the flat plate member 520 has the first passage entrance 504a and the second passage entrance 504a. The second passage entrance 505a is positioned at a portion that separates from 505a and the second passage entrance 505a is closed by the flat plate member 520, and it becomes impossible to capture the game ball rolling on the board surface of the game board 40. At this time, the first passage entrance 504a is open.

Next, the operation of the winning unit 415 of Modification 5 will be described.
In the first and second time saving game states, while the normal symbol is changing, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 63 (a), the flat plate member 520 is retracted, so that it is right-handed. The game ball passes near the opening 40a and falls as it is.

  When the normal symbol game is won in the second time saving game state, the flat plate member 520 projects to the board surface of the game board 40 for a predetermined time, and as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 63 (b), the second passage The ball entrance 505a is opened only once for a relatively long time (hereinafter referred to as long opening). During the long opening, the time for which the flat plate member 520 projects is the time from when the game ball is caught on the tip of the flat plate member 520 until it is determined that it reaches the second operating mechanism 513, that is, the second passage. The time is set to be equal to or longer than the time it takes to reach the entrance port 505a. Therefore, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 moves on the flat plate member 520 and enters the second passage ball inlet 505a on the front side. The game ball that has passed through the second passage entrance 505a operates the operation mechanism 513 to open the second non-electric accessory 415c.

  When the normal symbol game is won in the first time shortened game state, the flat plate member 520 projects multiple times on the board surface of the game board 40 within a predetermined time, and the second passage entrance 505a is opened for a short time (hereinafter, A state in which a short circuit is opened) is formed a plurality of times. During the short opening, the time for which the flat plate member 520 projects is set to be shorter than the time from when the gaming ball rides on the tip of the flat plate member 520 and is captured until it reaches the second passage entrance 505a in the long opening. ing. Therefore, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 tries to move on the flat plate member 520 while the flat plate member 520 is protruding, as shown in FIGS. 62 (c) and 63 (c). Previously, the flat plate member 520 slides while the game ball is on the flat plate member 520, and the second passage ball inlet 505a is closed. Therefore, after the flat plate member 520 is retracted, the game ball on the flat plate member 520 is conveyed by the flat plate member 520 and further moves on the flat plate member 520, as shown in FIGS. 62 (d) and 63 (d). And enters the first passage entrance 504a on the back side. The game ball that has passed through the first passage entrance 504a operates the operation mechanism 511 to open the first non-electric accessory 415b.

  The open time in the short open is shorter than the time required for the game ball on the flat plate member 520 to reach the second passage entrance 505a when the flat plate member 520 projects, and the open time and the open in the short open The closing time between the time and the time is set to be equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball on the flat plate member 520 to reach the second passage entrance 505a when the flat plate member 520 is projected.

  According to the modified example 5 configured in this manner, the game ball is mechanically moved to the first non-electric accessory 415b side or the second non-electric accessory 415c without using the distribution device 506 as in the present embodiment. The distribution solenoid 121 can be distributed, and the distribution solenoid 121 used in the present embodiment can be omitted. Furthermore, since the process of step S41 of FIG. 12 can be omitted, the control load on the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

  According to the fifth modification described above, the first non-electric accessory 415b is easily opened when the short is opened, and the second non-electric accessory 415c is easily opened when the long is opened. The second non-electrical accessory 415c may be opened easily when the short is opened, and the first non-electrical accessory 415b may be easily opened when the long is opened.

[Modification 6]
64 to 66 are diagrams showing a configuration of a main part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 6. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example 6 is different in part of the configuration of the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment.

[Structure of winning unit 415]
The configuration of the main part of the winning unit 415 in Modification 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. The same members or members having the same functions as the members constituting the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  64: is explanatory drawing which shows schematic structure of the winning unit 415 in the modification 6, FIG.64 (a) is a top view, FIG.64 (b) is a side view of FIG.64 (a), FIG.64 (c). Is a plan view showing the flow of game balls in the long opening, and FIG. 64 (d) is a plan view showing the flow of game balls in the short opening. FIG. 65 is a front view of the electric tulip 523 used in the winning unit 415 in the modified example 6, and FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 40 in which the electric tulip 523 is arranged.

  The winning unit 415 in Modification 6 includes a first passage 504, a second passage 505, and an electric tulip 523. Comparing the winning unit 415 in Modification 6 with the winning unit 415 in the present embodiment, the configuration of the first passage 504 and the second passage 505, the electric tulip 523 is provided, and the distribution device 506 is omitted. Is different.

  The first passage 504 of the modified example 6 is made of a member having a substantially rectangular tube shape, and has a tip portion projecting on the board surface of the game board 40 and a center extending from this tip portion on the back side of the game board 40 and obliquely downward. And a connecting portion formed at the lower end of the central portion and connected to the first operating mechanism 511. A first passage entrance 504b that is open upward is formed at the tip of the first passage 504, and the tip (front surface) of the first passage 504 is closed. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first passage entrance 504a is guided to the first actuation mechanism 511 through the first passage 504.

  The second passage 505 of the modified example 6 is made of a substantially rectangular tube-shaped member like the first passage 504, and is arranged on the back surface of the game board 40. A second passage entrance 505a is formed at the tip of the second passage 505 of Modification 6, and the second passage entrance 505a is opened upward. Therefore, the game ball whose rolling path has been changed to the back side of the game board 40 by the electric tulip 523 enters the second passage entrance 505a and passes through the second passage 505 to the second actuation mechanism 513. Be guided.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the electric tulip 523 is arranged immediately below the ball passage detector 416 on the board surface of the game board 40 and directly above the first passage entrance 504a of the first passage 504.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the electric tulip 523 is provided with a pair of blade members 524. The pair of blade members 524 have their base end portions rotatably attached to drive the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111. It rotates by doing. In the electric tulip 523, the pair of blade members 524 are separated from each other so that the game ball can enter the open state, and the tip portions of the pair of blade members 524 contact each other, and the game ball cannot enter. Switch to state and.

  As shown in FIG. 64, plate-shaped guide plates 524a and 524a extending toward the game board 40 are formed at the base ends of the pair of blade members 524. When the electric tulip 523 is opened, the guide plates 524a and 524a are formed into a single plate shape with the guide plates 524a and 524a contacting each other as shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 65 (b). , Functions as a guide for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 40. Further, when the electric tulip 523 is closed, as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 65 (c), the guide plates 524a and 524a are separated from each other, and the game is performed between the pair of blade members 524 and 524. An opening is formed through which the sphere can fall.

  Therefore, while the electric tulip 523 is open, the game ball riding on the pair of blade members 524 is guided to the back side of the game board 40 by the guide plates 524a and 524a and enters the second passage ball inlet 505b. To make a ball. The game ball that has entered the second passage entrance 505b is sent to the second actuation mechanism 513, so that the second non-electric accessory 415c is opened. In addition, the game ball riding on the pair of blade members 524 just before the electric tulip 523 closes passes through the electric tulip 523 as it is and enters the first passage entrance 504b. The game ball that has entered the first passage ball inlet 504b is sent to the first actuation mechanism 511, so that the first non-electric accessory 415b is opened.

  According to the modified example 6, when the normal symbol game is won in the second short time gaming state, the electric tulip 523 is opened only once for a relatively long time (hereinafter referred to as long opening). When the normal symbol game is won in the first short time gaming state, the electric tulip 523 is opened and closed for a short time (hereinafter referred to as short opening) a plurality of times. According to the modified example 6, the opening time of the electric tulip 523 is set so that the game ball does not enter the electric tulip 523 at the end of the long opening.

  In the second short time game state, the game ball that has been hit to the right during long opening rides on the pair of blade members 524 and is guided by the guide plates 524a and 524a as shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 65 (b). The second non-electric accessory 415c is opened by being guided by the back side of the game board 40 and entering the second passage entrance 505b. Then, at the end of the long opening, the electric tulip 523 is closed after a predetermined time. At this time, if there is a game ball that rarely enters the electric tulip 523 just before the electric tulip 523 closes, the game ball drops the electric tulip 523 and enters the first passage entrance 504b to enter the first passage. The non-electric accessory 415b is opened. Thus, there is a possibility that the first non-electric accessory 415b may be opened in the second short time gaming state.

  In the first short time gaming state, if the game ball that has been hit to the right during the opening of a plurality of shorts enters the electric tulip 523, the game ball is as shown in FIG. 64 (d) and FIG. 65 (c). Then, it falls from the electric tulip 523 by passing through the gap between the pair of blade members 524, enters the first passage entrance 504b, and opens the first non-electric accessory 415b.

  According to the modified example 6 configured in this manner, similarly to the modified example 5, the game ball is mechanically moved to the first non-electric auditors role 415b side or the first non-electric accessory 415b side without using the distribution device 506 as in the present embodiment. It becomes possible to distribute to the two non-electrical accessory 415c, and it becomes possible to omit the distribution solenoid 121 used in the present embodiment. Furthermore, since the process of step S41 of FIG. 12 can be omitted, the control load on the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

  According to the sixth modification described above, the first non-electric accessory 415b is easily opened in the case of short opening, and the second non-electric accessory 415c is easily opened in the case of long opening. On the contrary, the second non-electric accessory 415c may be easily opened when the short is opened, and the first non-electric accessory 415b may be easily opened when the long is opened.

  Although the present embodiment of the present invention and its modifications have been described above, the present embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, the second short time gaming state may be a so-called probability changing state in which the winning probability of the special figure 2 lottery is changed to a high probability state.

  In addition, the second modification is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine of one type and two types mixing, but can be applied to a so-called ST (special time) gaming machine.

  The ST machine is a so-called RUSH state in which it is possible to perform a special symbol lottery with a high probability with a high probability at a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) when a special symbol lottery results in a RUSH state. In the case of a big hit, the RUSH state continues, and when the big hit does not occur, it refers to a model that shifts to a low probability state (normal game state).

  The appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is called an ST machine, is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, but an accessory placed on the board surface of the game board 40. Some functions are different.

  Specifically, the V winning opening 424 does not generate a V jackpot, but by entering the V winning opening 424 during a jackpot game, a high-probability state (probably changed state) is generated after the jackpot is finished (that is, (Continues the RUSH state) Functions as a stochastic state operating port.

  More specifically, when the special symbol stops at a specific symbol and becomes a big hit for 15 rounds, for example, in the 14th round, the shutter 417 is not opened, but the attacker 421 is opened. At this time, the movable member 426 is in an open state. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 424 through the attacker 421, the movable member 426 is operated to close the V winning opening 424. By the game ball entering the V winning opening 424, the condition for continuing the RUSH state is established. In addition, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 424, the game state shifts to, for example, a low probability state and a time-shortening game state with a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  Other accessories, that is, the central starting port 414a, the first starting port 414b, the second starting port 414c, the winning unit 415, the ball passage detector 416, the shutter 417, the big winning port 418, the general winning ports 419a to 419c, etc. The same configuration and the same function as the present embodiment.

  Then, by executing the second short working time game state in the modified example 2 of the present embodiment with a high probability state, the player expects that the ST machine will be a big hit before becoming a low probability state. Will proceed. Even if the low probability state is reached, the RUSH state is continued if a big hit and a V prize is won.

[Operation and effect of this embodiment]

  According to the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first non-electric accessory 415b is likely to be in the open state in the first short time gaming state and shifts to the jackpot gaming state or the V jackpot gaming state, There is a possibility that after the jackpot game state ends, the second non-electric auditors object 415c is more likely to be in the open state than in the first short time gaming state than in the gaming state when the big hit gaming state is entered. Since it becomes higher, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the first shorter working time game state. As described above, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the present embodiment, before the big hit game state ends, it is notified whether the game state after the big hit game state is the normal game state, the first short time gaming state or the second short time gaming state. It is possible to give the player an interest in the performance during the big hit game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the big hit game state or the V big hit game state is transferred in the second short time gaming state, the probability of becoming the second short time gaming state again after the big hit gaming state ends is the normal game state or the first. Since it is higher than the case of shifting to the big hit game state in the time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the big hit game state or the V big hit game state is easily repeated. Thus, the second short time gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first short time gaming state.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention. That is, the gaming machine of the present invention is mainly configured such that a gaming board having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll and a gaming medium divided into a first area and a second area, which are different from each other in the gaming area, are divided. A launching means capable of launching a game medium to the game area while adjusting a launch strength of the game medium, a first starting area arranged in the first area, through which the game medium can pass, and the first area. A second starting area, through which a game medium can pass, and one of the first starting area passing the game medium and the second starting area passing the game medium, which gives a predetermined game value to the player. Lottery means for deciding with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to an assignable special game state, identification information display means for notifying a lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping identification information, and the identification information display means Stop display mode It is possible to switch between a game state control means for switching the game state according to the first state and a second state which is arranged in the first starting area and in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. There is a first displacement member that guides the game medium to the first starting area when the game medium is captured in the first state, and a first state that is arranged in the second starting area and is easy to capture the game medium. A second displacing member which can be switched to either a second state where it is difficult to capture a game medium, and which guides the game medium to the second starting area when the game medium is captured in the first state, and a game medium. And a first actuating mechanism for switching the first displacement member to the first state and switching the first displacement member from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media. , Game media And a second actuating mechanism that switches the second displacing member to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the second displacing member and switches the second displacing member from the first state to the second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media. , A first area which is arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a first state in which the game medium which is arranged in the first area and has passed through the passage area can be easily captured and the game medium is difficult to capture The second displacing member which is switchable to the second state and which is electrically operable, and the third displacing member which is in the second state are triggered by the passage of the game medium through the passage area. The drive determination means for determining whether to switch to the state with a predetermined probability, the drive means for switching the third displacement member to the first state, and the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first actuation mechanism. The first passage leading to Distribution means that distributes to any one of the second passages leading to the second operation mechanism, and the game state control means, the game state after the end of the special game state, the third displacement member is in the first state The first specific state in which the distribution means is highly likely to guide the game medium captured while being switched to the first passage, and the third displacement member being captured when being switched to the first state A second specific state in which the distribution means is less likely to guide the game medium to the first passage than the first specific state and is highly likely to guide the game medium to the second passage, the first specific state and the There is a game state setting means for setting to one of two normal states, in which the probability of determining that the third displacement member is switched to the first state by the drive determination means is lower than in a specific state, and the second area. Passing the game medium in the first starting area In the normal state, the game state after the special game state is executed triggered by the game state, and the game state after the special game state is executed by the passage of the game medium in the first starting region of the first region. The transition probability is the same, the game state after the end of the special game state, which was executed by the passage of the game medium in the first starting region of the second region, and the game medium in the first starting region of the first region. The probability of shifting to the second specific state in the game state after the end of the special game state executed by the passage is higher when the game medium in the first starting region of the first region is passed. The game board, the launching means, the first starting area, the second starting area, the lottery means, the identification information display means, the game state control means, the first displacement member, the second displacement member, the first Actuating mechanism, second Kinematic mechanism, passing area, the third displacement member, the drive judging means, drive means, sorting means, gaming state setting means, the specific configuration of such, can be designed and changed as required.

[Appendix 1]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, there are a type called a digital pachi and a type called a blade mono. In the past, there was an era when the types of pachinko game machines were stipulated in the Customs and Business Law.

  In a pachinko game machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and this game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, stopping the display, and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, a three-digit doublet like “777”), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) should be given to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state where it is possible.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a wing mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When the player enters the open chucker, the blade member of the winning prize opens, and the game ball can enter the winning prize. Then, when the blade member is opened, the game ball riding on the blade member enters the prize winning object, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening in the prize winning object, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. As a result, the game ball in the prize winning object is shifted to the big hit game state where it is easy to enter the game ball. The player is provided with a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) in accordance with the game balls entering the winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-type / 2-type mixing machine in which a digital pachi and a blade mono are mixed has appeared on the market. As a pachinko game machine of this type, one disclosed in Patent Document 1 has been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, as a result of the random number lottery triggered by the first starting mouth prize and the second starting mouth prize, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (so-called big jackpot), the first starting mouth prize and the second. As a result of random number lottery triggered by the start winning a prize, it is determined that it is a small hit and shifts to the small hitting game state, and the game ball on the blade member opened in the small hitting game state is the V winning hole in the winning prize In the case of winning a prize (so-called, two-type big hit), a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a big hit game state is disclosed.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting opening (so-called belly button) is arranged in the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly below the opening. The second starting port is arranged immediately below. Furthermore, a winning combination having a V winning opening and a passage gate having a ball passage detecting sensor are arranged in the right side area of the board. The second starting opening winning is possible only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passage gate. Therefore, in order to win the second start opening, the so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is hit in the right side area of the board surface.

  Therefore, first, the player hits the game ball into the left side area of the board, so-called left hitting, aiming for the first starting mouth winning. If the big hit is won with the first start mouth winning as a trigger, there is a case where after the big hit game state ends, the electric tulip can be shifted to the short time game state in which it is easy to open. In the time saving game state, the player opens the electric tulip by right-handing, and aims for the second starting mouth winning. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning combination as a trigger, the game ball may win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If the player wins the V winning opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to the time saving playing state again after the big hitting game state ends, there is a possibility that the V winning hole is won and a big hit occurs. In this way, by repeating the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the player may get more prize balls.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital patch, when the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is transitioned to after the jackpot game state is over (when the high probability state is not transitioned), for example, until the number of times the identification symbol varies 100 times. It is common to use an electric tulip that facilitates opening, that is, a type that employs a so-called electric Chu support.

  However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the type 1 and type 2 mixture described above, based on the technical standard that up to one electric tulip can be arranged, an electric tulip that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening There is no such accessory. For this reason, in the above-mentioned one-two-mixed pachinko gaming machine, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state when shifting to the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Since transitioning to the normal game state for the player after the jackpot gaming state ends significantly reduces the player's willingness to continue the game, the game is often finished when the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, the player may feel that the game is unsatisfactory because there is no electronic Chu support that is often used in conventional digital patches. In particular, in the case of a normal big hit in the high-probability state, if there is no electric-chu support after the big-hit game state ends, there is a possibility that the player may feel unsatisfactory.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems and can improve the enjoyment of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area (which are different from each other) included in the game area. A launching means (eg, launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (eg, a game ball) in the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium so that the game medium is divided into left-handed areas). ) And a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting port 414c), the first starting area that can give a predetermined game value to the player triggered by either the passage of the game medium in the first starting area or the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. Special game state (for example, jackpot) (Game state), a lottery means (for example, a predetermined probability) for determining whether or not to shift to a second special game state (for example, a small hitting game state) in which a predetermined game value smaller than the first special game state can be given. , The main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, step S323, S329 of FIG. 36), and identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information. , A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) for switching the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means, and the game medium arranged in the first starting area, so that the game medium can be easily captured. It is possible to switch between the first state and the second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. When the game medium is captured in the first state, A first displacing member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area and a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and arranged in the second starting area. It is possible to switch to either the second state where it is difficult to capture, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric motor) that guides the game medium to the second starting region. With the accessory 415c) and the passage of the game medium, the first displacing member is switched to the first state, and the first displacing member captures a predetermined number of the game medium, whereby the second state is changed to the second state. A first operating mechanism (for example, a first operating mechanism 511) that switches to the state and the second displacement member that switches to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the game medium, and the second displacement member has a predetermined number of games. Capturing media The second operating mechanism (for example, the second operating mechanism 513) that switches from the first state to the second state, and the passing area (for example, the ball passing detector 416) that is arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass. And, it is possible to switch between a first state in which it is arranged in the first region and in which it is easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passage region, and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and which is electrically operable. With a third displacement member (for example, the flat plate member 520) and the passage of the game medium through the passage area as a trigger, whether or not the third displacement member in the second state is switched to the first state has a predetermined probability. Drive determining means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) determined by 1., a driving means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111) for switching the third displacement member to the first state, and the third variable. A distribution means (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing the game medium captured by the member to one of a first passage leading to the first operating mechanism and a second passage leading to the second operating mechanism, and at least the first passage. 2 A fourth displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that is driven in a special game state and is switchable between a first state in which it is easy to capture a game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture a game medium, and the first region The special winning area (for example, the V winning opening 424, which serves as an opportunity for the gaming state control means to shift the gaming state to the first special gaming state by passing the gaming medium captured by the fourth displacing member. ), And the probability that the second special game state is determined by the lottery means is one when the game medium passage in the second starting area is used as a trigger. The probability is set to a higher probability than in the case of an excess (for example, the table in FIG. 7A), and the gaming state control means sets the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state to the third displacement. A first specific state (for example, a first short time gaming state) in which the distribution means is highly likely to guide the game medium captured while the member is switched to the first state, and the third The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured when the displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage is lower than that in the first specific state and may lead to the second passage. A higher second specific state (for example, a second shortened gaming state) and a lower probability of determining that the drive determining means switches the third displacement member to the first state than the first specific state and the second specific state. Normal state (for example, normal game state) , And has a game state setting means (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 of FIG. 24) that is set to any of the above, and the game medium passage in the second starting area is used as a trigger to shift by the lottery means. The probability of being in the normal state after the determined first special game state is over and after the end of the first special game state, which is executed with the passage of the special winning area, is the passage of the game medium in the first starting area. The probability is smaller than the probability of becoming the normal state after the end of the first special game state, the transition of which has been determined by the lottery means, and the transition of which has been determined by the lottery means upon the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. The first specific state after the end of the first special game state, and after the end of the first special game state executed by the passage of the special winning area The probability of becoming is larger than the probability of becoming the first specific state after the end of the first special game state in which the shift has been determined by the lottery means upon the passage of the game medium in the first starting area (for example, FIG. ) Table).

  According to the above configuration, the possibility of shifting to the first special game state (the big hit game state by the two-class big hit (V big hit)) by winning the special prize area (V winning hole 424) is the first specific state ( Since the second specific state (second short time gaming state) is higher than the first short time gaming state, the second specific state (second short time gaming state) is higher than the first specific state (first short time gaming state). Is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the special game while expecting to shift to the second specific state (second time saving game state) after the end of the first special game state.

  Further, according to the above configuration, after the first special game state triggered by the passage of the game medium to the second starting area or the passage of the game medium to the special winning area, the first specific state (first short time gaming state) is set. The probability of becoming is higher than the probability of becoming the first specific state (first short time gaming state) after the end of the first special gaming state that has transitioned with the passage of the game medium to the first starting area. Therefore, after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the first specific state (first time saving game state) or the second specific state (second time saving game state), and the game medium in this specific state (time saving game state) When the player passes through the special winning area and shifts to the first special game state (so-called consecutive chan), even if the second time saving game state that is advantageous to the player does not come after the end of the first special game state, the time saving The possibility of shifting to the advantageous first short time gaming state, which is more advantageous than when no game is given, becomes higher than after the end of the first special gaming state. As a result, when the game player shifts to the first specific state (first time saving game state), the player continues playing while expecting to shift to the next special game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the distribution unit guides the game medium captured by the third displacement member (flat plate member 520) to the first passage and the second operation mechanism for guiding the game medium to the first operation mechanism. By allocating to any one of the second passages, one of the first displacement member (first non-electrically-powered object 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrically-powered object 415c) is in the first state. This makes it possible to divide into a game medium that passes the first starting area and a game medium that passes the second starting area while maintaining the technical standard that up to one electric accessory can be arranged. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a pachinko gaming machine of a mixture of one type and two types.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is arranged in the vicinity of the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) and can be opened and closed in the first special game state (for example, a fifth displacement member (for example, , Shutter 417) is further provided.

  According to the above configuration, for example, in the first special game state, the game medium passes near the second displacement member (the second non-electric accessory 415c), so it is provisionally just before the first special game state or the first special game state. Even if the second displacement member (the second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state) during the state, the game medium enters the second displacement member during the first special game state It becomes a state (closed state). This makes it difficult to leave the second displacing member in the first state (open state) after the end of the first special game, for example, in the case of the normal game state after the end of the first special game state, It is possible to prevent the game medium from passing through the second starting area, which is advantageous for the player, and leave an opportunity that the second special game state (small hit) can change to the first special game state (V big hit). Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the fairness of the game.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises, in the above-mentioned configuration, a hold control means for holding a predetermined number of triggers for the change of the identification information when the game medium passes through the first starting area during the change of the identification information, The identification information display means is characterized in that, when the game medium passes through the second starting area while the identification information is changing, the identification information is not changed based on the passage of the game medium.

  According to the above configuration, when the game medium passes through the second starting area, the variation of the identification information (for example, the special symbol) is not held, so that the second starting area is set after the end of the first and second special game states. The variation of the identification information based on the passage of the game medium is not executed. Therefore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) does not become the first state due to the change and stop of the identification information, and the normal state or the first identification after the special gaming state ends. It is possible to prevent the game medium from remaining in a state in which it can pass through the second starting area when the state shifts. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the fairness of the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine of mixed type 1 and 2 which can improve the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine of mixed type 1 and 2.

[Appendix 2]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

  For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes an opening / closing area to allow a game ball to enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by a player operating a launching device, and the game ball enters a start opening provided in the game area. When the ball is played, random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, and the stop display is performed. The person is notified.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a winning start prize, most players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win a winning start prize. However, with regard to the action of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening, the attention frequency is low because the action frequency is low, and even the action of the attacker may not be noticed. Especially, in the time saving game state, since the time from the starting mouth winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the operation of the attacker, and as a result, it is not noticed. Often.

  Therefore, the player hits the game ball in the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time saving game, confirms the start winning while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and informs that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of times saved will be digested intently with the expectation that a performance will occur or that all identification information will be a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a special interest to the player in the time saving game state.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area (which are different from each other) included in the game area. A launching means (eg, a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium (eg, a game ball) so that the game medium is divided into left-handed areas). ) And a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting opening 414c), and the special game that can give a predetermined game value to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game medium in the first starting area or the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. State (for example, jackpot game Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, step S323, S329 of FIG. 36) for determining whether or not to shift to the state and the small hitting gaming state) with a predetermined probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. , Step S71 in FIG. 13), and it is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, which is disposed in the first start region, A first displacement member that guides the game medium to the first starting region when the game medium is captured in the one state (for example, the blade portion of the first non-electric accessory 415b). 510) and a second state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which the game medium is easily captured, which is disposed in the second starting area, and the game medium is difficult to be captured in the first state. If the second displacement member (for example, the blade member 512 of the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region when the game medium is captured, the first displacement is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A first operating mechanism (for example, a first operating mechanism 511) that switches the member to the first state and switches from the first state to the second state by the first displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media, and a game. A second operation mechanism that switches the second displacement member to the first state in conjunction with the passage of the medium and switches the first state to the second state by the second displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media. ( For example, a second actuation mechanism 513), a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a passage area that is arranged in the first area and passes through the passage area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and an electrically operable third displacement member (for example, a flat plate member of the ordinary electric accessory 415a). 520), and drive determination means for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state upon the passage of the game medium through the passage area (for example, The main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26), driving means for switching the third displacement member to the first state (for example, a normal electric accessory solenoid 111), and the game medium captured by the third displacement member, Distribution means (for example, distribution device 506) for distributing to either the first passage leading to the first actuation mechanism or the second passage leading to the second actuation mechanism, and the production means for performing various effects (for example, liquid crystal display The device 50) and the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201, steps S1014 and S1015 in FIG. 38) for controlling the effect means, and the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. The lottery is more advantageous than the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the first starting area (the table shown in FIG. 7), and the effect control means is such that the game medium ejected is the third displacement member. It is possible to notify the firing timing that is likely to be guided to the second passage when captured by the CPU (for example, the sub CPU 201, steps S1063 and S10 in FIG. 48). 5) and said.

  According to the above configuration, when the emitted game medium is captured by the third displacement member (the flat plate member 520), the timing at which the captured game medium is likely to be guided to the second passage is notified. The player is less likely to miss the firing timing at which the second displacement member (blade member 512), which is advantageous to the player, can be brought to the first state (open state). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest that the player himself / herself can obtain a favorable state by operating the launching means, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to provide various gaming machines.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the gaming state control means captures the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the third displacement member is switched to the first state. A first specific state (for example, a first time shortened game state) that continues until a lot of lottery is performed by the lottery means in a state where the possibility of guiding the medium to the first passage is increased. The possibility that the distribution means guides the game medium captured while the third displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage is lower than that in the first specific state and leads to the second passage. In a state where the possibility is high, a game state setting means (for example, a second specific state (for example, a second short time gaming state) that continues until a lot of times is drawn by the lottery means, and a game state setting means (for example, , The main CP 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24), the effect control means, in the second specific state, when the emitted game medium is captured by the third displacement member, the game medium is the second. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the firing timing that is highly likely to be guided to the passage (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S1071 and S1072 in FIG. 24).

  According to the above configuration, in the second specific state where it is easy to pass the game medium to the second starting area, which is a trigger for the lottery advantageous to the player, the player can surely pass the game medium to the second starting area. To operate the launcher.

  Further, the game machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, changes the normal symbol triggered by the passage of the game medium in the passing area, and informs the player of the determination result of the drive determination means by the stop display mode of the ordinary symbol. A normal symbol display means (for example, a normal symbol display device 434) and a distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S41 of FIG. 12) are further provided, and the distribution control means is When the game medium is launched at the time when the normal symbol display means stops the normal symbol, the game medium is distributed to the first passage after being distributed to the second passage and then to the first passage. It is performed at the timing of reaching the first passage (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 30), and the effect control means changes the normal symbol. During the period, the effect of notifying that it is the timing when the game medium that has been shot reaches the second passage in the period in which the game medium is distributed to the second passage (for example, the sub CPU 201, launch timing notification setting of FIG. 49) Processing).

  According to the above structure, the normal symbol display means fluctuates because the second displacement member advantageous to the player cannot be put into the first state even when the game medium is shot when the normal symbol is stopped. It becomes possible to make the player aware of launching the game medium while playing. Also, while the design is fluctuating, the player is made aware of the fact that the game medium is shot during this effect by performing an effect that informs that it is the timing to reach the second passage. Will be possible. In this way, it becomes possible to provide the player with a new interest in making the regular symbols pay attention.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the third displacement member is driven in a plurality of drive patterns (for example, the opening patterns of the ordinary electric auditors product 415a in the opening patterns E and F of FIG. 47). Characterize.

  According to the above configuration, the third displacement member (normal electric accessory 415a) is driven by the plurality of drive patterns, so that the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is brought into the first state, for example. The firing timing will change. Therefore, it is possible to add variety to the effect for notifying the timing of launching the game medium.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the effect control means operates the launching means at a timing when the launched game medium arrives at the first passage during a period in which the game medium is distributed to the first passage. The present invention is characterized in that the effect means is controlled so as to perform an effect that is operated by using the hand (for example, the processing of FIG. 50 by the sub CPU 201, the game effect display 58 of FIG. 51C).

  According to the above configuration, by performing an effect of operating the launching means with the hand operating the launching means according to the rendering means, if the player operates according to the rendering, the shot game medium is distributed to the first passage. In, the player is in a state of not operating the launching means. In this way, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member, which is disadvantageous to the player, from entering the first state.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a pachinko gaming machine.

[Appendix 3]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

  For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes an opening / closing area to allow a game ball to enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by a player operating a launching device, and the game ball enters a start opening provided in the game area. When the ball is played, random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, and the stop display is performed. The person is notified.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a big hit or a small hit is triggered by a winning start prize, most players mainly pay attention to whether or not to win a winning start prize. However, with regard to the action of the attacker that guides the game ball to the V winning opening, the attention frequency is low because the action frequency is low, and even the action of the attacker may not be noticed. Especially, in the time saving game state, since the time from the starting mouth winning to the V winning via the small hit is short, the big hit is suddenly notified before confirming the operation of the attacker, and as a result, it is not noticed. Often.

  Therefore, the player hits the game ball in the area where the V winning opening is arranged during the time saving game, confirms the start winning while looking at the vicinity of the electric tulip, and informs that the game ball has won the V winning opening. The number of times saved will be digested intently with the expectation that a performance will occur or that all identification information will be a big hit. As described above, conventionally, it has been difficult to give a special interest to the player in the time saving game state.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area (which are different from each other) included in the game area. A launching means (eg a launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium so that the game medium (eg, a game ball) is shot into the left-handed area). ) And a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting opening 414c), and the special game that can give a predetermined game value to the player, triggered by either the passage of the game medium in the first starting area or the passage of the game medium in the second starting area. State (for example, jackpot game Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, step S323, S329 of FIG. 36) for determining whether or not to shift to the state and the small hitting gaming state) with a predetermined probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. , Step S71 in FIG. 13), and it is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, which is disposed in the first start region, A first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area when the game medium is captured in the first state, When the game medium is captured in the first state, the game medium can be switched between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium. A second displacement member (for example, a second non-electrically-powered object 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region is linked to the passage of the game medium to switch the first displacement member to the first state, and A first operating mechanism (for example, a first operating mechanism 511) that switches from a first state to a second state by the first displacement member capturing a predetermined number of game media, and in conjunction with the passage of the game media, A second operating mechanism (for example, a second operating mechanism 513) that switches the second displacing member to the first state and switches the first displacing member to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media. When, A passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a first area which is arranged in the first area and which makes it easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passage area The game medium has passed through the third displacement member (eg, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched to the second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and that is electrically operable, and the passage area. Drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, with the third state. Driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, the normal electric accessory solenoid 111), the first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first operation mechanism, and the second operation mechanism. To And a distribution device (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing to any one of the second passages, and the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium in the second starting region is the first starting region. Is advantageous over the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the passage of the game medium, and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the special game state to the lottery means after the end of the special game state. One lottery by one game is set as a game, and is captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state for a predetermined first game number (for example, a second time saving game state time saving number). After executing the second specific state (for example, the second short time gaming state) in which the distribution means is highly likely to guide the game medium to the second passage, and after executing the game for the first number of times, it is determined in advance. Number of second games played For example, during the shortened number of times in the first time-saving game state), the distribution means may guide the game medium captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state to the first passage. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a special game state in which a first specific state (for example, a first short time gaming state) higher than a second specific state is executed (table in FIG. 53).

  According to the above configuration, when the special game state (for example, the time saving game state) is executed after the special game state is finished, the game is first played during the first game number (for example, the time saving number in the second time saving game state). A second specific state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the second shortened gaming state) is executed, and then a first disadvantageous to the player for the second number of games (for example, the shortened number of times of the first shortened gaming state). A specific state (for example, the first short time gaming state) is executed. For this reason, it is most desirable for the player to shift to the special game state in the second specific state, but even if the state shifts from the second specific state to the first specific state, the drive determination means causes the third displacement member to move. If the determination to switch to the first state is made, there is a high possibility that the first displacement member will be in the first state and the game medium will pass through the first starting area, and the lottery by the lottery means will be facilitated. As a result, when the game player shifts to the first specific state (first time saving game state), the player continues playing while expecting to shift to the next special game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the pachinko gaming machine.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the special game state is less than a first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player, and the first special game state. Including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) capable of giving a predetermined game value, driven in at least the second special game state, and a first state in which a game medium can be easily captured and a game medium capture The fourth displacement member (for example, the attacker 421) that can be switched to the second state where it is difficult to move, and the game state that is arranged in the first region and the game medium captured by the fourth displacement member passes therethrough. The control means further comprises a special winning area (for example, a V winning opening 424) that triggers the game state to shift to the first special gaming state, and the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means. The probability of being set is set to be higher when the game medium passing through the second starting area is used as an opportunity than when the game medium passing through the first starting area is used as an opportunity. Is a game state after the end of the first special game state executed by the passage of the game medium in the special winning area, the first special game triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area The feature is that switching is performed in the same manner as after the end of the state.

  According to the above configuration, the possibility of shifting to the first specific state, which is disadvantageous to the player, increases in the latter half of the special game state. Therefore, it is conventionally executed depending on the model of the one-kind two-mixer, When a special hitting method called V removal is performed, there is a high possibility that the first number of games in the second specific state, which is advantageous to the player, will be wasted, and there is no merit to perform V removal. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent V removal.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, a plurality of the second game number and the first game number are distributed so that the sum of the second game number and the first game number becomes a constant value. It is characterized by further comprising a game number determining means for determining the second number of games and the first number of games from the selection pattern.

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the number of games in the special game state is 100, the first number of games is 20, the second number of games is 80, the first number of games is 80, and the second number of games is Various patterns such as 20 times can be set. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the number of times of the first game, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it becomes possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix 4]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, there are a type called a digital pachi and a type called a blade mono. In the past, there was an era when the types of pachinko game machines were stipulated in the Customs and Business Law.

  In a pachinko game machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and this game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, stopping the display, and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, a three-digit doublet like “777”), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) should be given to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state where it is possible.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a wing mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the opened chucker, the blade member of the winning combination opens and the game ball can enter the winning combination. Then, when the blade member opens, the game ball placed on the blade member enters the prize winning object, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening in the prize winning object, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. The game ball enters the electric accessory to make a big hit game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball. The player is provided with a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) in accordance with the game balls entering the winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-type / 2-type mixing machine in which a digital pachi and a blade mono are mixed has appeared on the market. As a pachinko game machine of this type, one disclosed in Patent Document 1 has been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, when the result of random number lottery triggered by the first start mouth prize and the second start mouth prize is determined to be a big hit (so-called big hit of one kind), the second start mouth prize is triggered. According to the result of the random number lottery, the game shifts to the small hitting game state, and when the game ball placed on the blade member opened in the small hitting game state wins the V winning opening in the winning a prize (so-called, two kinds big hit) , A pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state is disclosed.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting opening (so-called belly button) is arranged in the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly below the opening. The second starting port is arranged immediately below. Furthermore, a winning combination having a V winning opening and a passage gate having a ball passage detecting sensor are arranged in the right side area of the board. The second starting opening winning is possible only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passage gate. Therefore, in order to win the second start opening, the so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is hit in the right side area of the board surface.

  Therefore, first, the player hits the game ball into the left side area of the board, so-called left hitting, aiming for the first starting mouth winning. If the big hit is won with the first start mouth winning as a trigger, there is a case where after the big hit game state ends, the electric tulip can be shifted to the short time game state in which it is easy to open. In the time saving game state, the player opens the opening of the electric tulip by hitting the right side, and aims for the second starting mouth prize. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning combination as a trigger, the game ball may win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If the player wins the V winning opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to the time saving playing state again after the big hitting game state ends, there is a possibility that the V winning hole is won and a big hit occurs. In this way, by repeating the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the player may get more prize balls.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the time-saving game state of the above-mentioned one-two-kind mixed pachinko game machine, since the variation time of the identification symbol is short, the time from the small hit to the V winning is shortened, and as a result, it is suddenly a big hit. I have a strong impression. Therefore, compared to a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi, it is difficult to provide the player with an effect that expands the expectation for a big hit.

  In addition, a player who plays a pachinko game machine of a mixture of one type and two types, in the time saving game state, hits a game ball in the area where the V winning opening is arranged, and notifies that the gaming ball has won in the V winning opening. There is a tendency to end up expending less time and effort while expecting the production of production. As described above, it has been difficult to give a special interest to a player who plays a pachinko gaming machine of a mixture of one type and two types.

  It is an object of the present invention to solve such a problem, and in particular, to improve the enjoyment of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention has a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area (for example, a game area 41) in which a game medium can roll, and a game area for the game area while adjusting the emission strength of the game medium. A launching means (eg, launching device 20) capable of launching a medium (eg, a game ball), and a first starting area (eg, first starting opening 414b) disposed in the game area and allowing the game medium to pass therethrough. ), A second starting area (for example, a second starting opening 414c) that is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, a game medium passing through the first starting area and a game medium passing through the second starting area. One of the following, a first special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player (for example, a big hit game state), a second special game state in which a predetermined game value less than the first special game state can be given Gaming state (eg A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, steps S323, S329 of FIG. 36) for determining with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special game state including a small hit game state), and the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying the lottery result of the change and stop of the identification information, and a game state control means for switching the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means (for example, , The main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13, and a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) which is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, and which is arranged in the game area and passes through the passage area. It is possible to switch between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and a first electrically operable state. A predetermined probability as to whether or not the first displacement member in the second state is switched to the first state, triggered by the game medium having passed through the position member (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) and the passage area. Drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) determined by the above, drive means for switching the first displacement member to the first state (for example, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111), and at least the second special A second displacement member (for example, attacker 421) that is driven in the game state and is switchable between a first state where the game medium is easily captured and a second state where the game medium is difficult to be captured, and the second displacement member. Second displacement member control means (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S65 to 67 in FIG. 13) for performing control, and the second displacement member disposed in the game area and captured. A special winning area (for example, V winning opening 424) that is a trigger for the game state control means to shift the game state to the first special gaming state (for example, V jackpot gaming state) by passing the played gaming medium. ,, the second displacement member control means, when the second special game state, the second displacement member between the first state and the second state, the special prize area winning Displacement control can be executed based on one displacement mode among a plurality of types of predetermined displacement modes (small hitting opening patterns a to c in FIG. 60) having different rates. A displacement mode determination means for determining a mode (for example, the main CPU 101, step S135 in FIG. 18) is further provided, and the displacement mode determination means is a trigger to shift to a game state for determining the displacement mode. Characterized in that it is capable of determining the displacement mode based on the stop display mode of the identification information display means.

  According to the above configuration, there are a plurality of types of displacement modes of the second displacement member (for example, the attacker 421) in the second special game state (small hitting game state), and the winning rate in the special prize area is different for each displacement mode. There is. Further, the displacement mode of the second displacement member is determined by the stop display mode of the identification information display means that triggered the second special game state (small hitting game state). As described above, since the displacement mode of the second displacement member is not constant, the player becomes interested in the displacement mode of the second displacement member, and the game medium passes through the second displacement member. Expect to see the displacement of the second displacement member. In this way, it becomes possible to give a new interest to the player.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the stop display mode of the identification information display means is a plurality of second stop for notifying that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition to a second special gaming state. Including display modes (small hitting patterns 1 to 3 in FIG. 59 (d)), a plurality of types of the predetermined displacement modes are associated with any of the plurality of second stop display modes (for example, In FIG. 59 (d), the open pattern a and the open pattern c are associated with the small hit symbol 1), and the displacement mode determination means is the second stop display displayed by the identification information display means. It is characterized in that the displacement mode is determined based on the mode.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to set at least as many displacement modes of the second displacement member as the second stop display mode, and it is possible to diversify the displacement modes of the second displacement member. In this way, it becomes possible to give a new interest to the player.

  In the above-mentioned configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention can be switched between a first state in which the passage of the game medium into the special winning area and a second state in which the passage of the game medium into the special winning area is restricted. With a different regulating character (for example, the movable member 426), a regulating character controlling means (for example, the main CPU 101, which controls the driving of the regulating character in a fixed pattern when the second special game state is entered). And step S306) of FIG. 34.

  According to the above configuration, depending on the combination of the displacement mode of the second displacement member and the drive pattern of the restricting accessory, the difficulty level of the game ball passing through the special winning area varies depending on the game state. Here, since the restricting accessory has a constant drive pattern, the difficulty level of the game medium to pass through the special winning area is substantially determined by the displacement mode of the second displacement member. In other words, the passage difficulty level is low in the displacement mode in which the winning rate to the special prize region is high, and the passing difficulty level is high in the displacement mode in which the winning rate to the special prize region is low. For this reason, for example, a pattern that is long in the first state but difficult to win in the special winning area, or a high probability that the game medium passes through the second displacement member but the first state is short, with a high probability. It is possible to create various patterns such as a winning pattern for an area. As a result, even if the game medium passes through the second displacement member, it does not always pass through the special winning area, so that the player sees the vicinity of the second displacement member while expecting to pass through the special winning area. Become. In this way, it becomes possible to give a new interest to the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, a plurality of the displacement modes are associated with one second stop display mode, and a plurality of displacement modes are respectively associated with the plurality of second stop display modes. In the displacement mode of No., there are combinations in which the winning rates are different from each other (for example, in FIG. 59 (d), the open pattern a having a high difficulty level and the open pattern having a low difficulty level for the small winning symbol 1). (The pattern c is associated), the game state control means, the game state after the end of the first special game state, the drive determination means first the first displacement member in the second state. A game state setting that is set to any one of a specific state (for example, a time-saving game state) that makes a decision to switch to a state with a high probability and a normal state (for example, a normal game state) that makes a decision with a low probability. Means (eg The main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24), and in the specific state, the identification information display means displays the second stop display mode, and the displacement mode determination means changes to the second stop display mode. When determining the displacement mode based on the first specific state (first time saving game), there is a high possibility that the displacement mode with the low winning rate is selected from among the plurality of displacement modes associated with the second stop display mode. State) and a second specific state (second short time gaming state) in which there is a high possibility of selecting the displacement mode having a high winning rate.

  According to the above configuration, when comparing the first specific state (first short time gaming state), the second specific state (second short time gaming state), and the normal state (for example, normal gaming state), the game medium is special. The second specific state in which there is a high possibility of passing through the winning area is the most advantageous to the player, and then the first specific state and the normal state. Here, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the game state after the end of the first special game state is the first specific state or the second specific state, only by the displacement mode of the second displacement member. Therefore, during the period of the specific state, it is possible to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation for the occurrence of the first special game state due to the passage of the special winning area of the game medium.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game. In particular, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the pachinko game machine of the type 1 and type 2.

[Appendix 5]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, there are a type called a digital pachi and a type called a blade mono. In the past, there was an era when the types of pachinko game machines were stipulated in the Customs and Business Law.

  In a pachinko game machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and this game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, stopping the display, and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, a three-digit doublet like “777”), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) should be given to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state where it is possible.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a wing mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the opened chucker, the blade member of the winning combination opens and the game ball can enter the winning combination. Then, when the blade member opens, the game ball placed on the blade member enters the prize winning object, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening in the prize winning object, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. As a result, the game ball in the prize winning object is shifted to the big hit game state where it is easy to enter the game ball. The player is provided with a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) in accordance with the game balls entering the winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-type / 2-type mixing machine in which a digital pachi and a blade mono are mixed has appeared on the market. As a pachinko game machine of this type, one disclosed in Patent Document 1 has been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, as a result of the random number lottery triggered by the first starting mouth prize and the second starting mouth prize, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (so-called big jackpot), and the second starting mouth prize is a trigger. As a result of the random number lottery, it is determined that a small hit is made, and the small hit game state is entered, and in the small hit game state, when the game ball mounted on the blade member is won at the V winning opening in the winning a prize (so-called). 2 type jackpot), and a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting opening (so-called belly button) is arranged in the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly below the opening. The second starting port is arranged immediately below. Furthermore, a winning combination having a V winning opening and a passage gate having a ball passage detecting sensor are arranged in the right side area of the board. The second starting opening winning is possible only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passage gate. Therefore, in order to win the second start opening, the so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is hit in the right side area of the board surface.

  Therefore, first, the player hits the game ball into the left side area of the board, so-called left hitting, aiming for the first starting mouth winning. If the big hit is won with the first start mouth winning as a trigger, there is a case where after the big hit game state ends, the electric tulip can be shifted to the short time game state in which it is easy to open. In the time saving game state, the player opens the electric tulip by right-handing, and aims for the second starting mouth winning. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning combination as a trigger, the game ball may win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If the player wins the V winning opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to the time saving playing state again after the big hitting game state ends, there is a possibility that the V winning hole is won and a big hit occurs. In this way, by repeating the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the player may get more prize balls.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital patch, when the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is transitioned to after the jackpot game state is over (when the high probability state is not transitioned), for example, until the number of times the identification symbol varies 100 times. It is common to use an electric tulip that facilitates opening, that is, a type that employs a so-called electric Chu support.
However, in the pachinko game machine of the type 1 and type 2 mixture described above, an accessory such as an electric tulip that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is not arranged. For this reason, in the above-mentioned one-two-mix pachinko gaming machine, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state when shifting to the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Since transitioning to the normal game state for the player after the jackpot gaming state ends significantly reduces the player's willingness to continue the game, the game is often finished when the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, the player may feel that the game is unsatisfactory because there is no electronic Chu support that is often used in conventional digital patches.

  Regarding this problem, it is possible to arrange an accessory such as an electric tulip with respect to the first starting port. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a drive device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a drive device for an electric tulip. However, the increase in the number of electric solenoids not only increases the cost, but also requires a mechanism for discharging the heat generated from the electric solenoids.

  Therefore, as an accessory to be placed at the first starting opening or the second starting opening, instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of a game ball, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechachu. It is possible to adopt.

  However, the adoption of the mechanism may be a target of a fraudulent act in which a tulip blade member is forcibly released from the outside by using a special device to facilitate the entry of a game ball.

  It is an object of the present invention to solve the above problems and provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraud.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area (which are different from each other) included in the game area. A launching means (eg, launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (eg, a game ball) to the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium so that the game medium is divided into left-handed areas). ) And a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting port 414c), and the special game capable of giving a predetermined game value to the player triggered by either the passage of the game medium in the first starting region or the passage of the game medium in the second starting region. State (for example, jackpot game Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, step S323, S329 of FIG. 36) that determines whether or not to shift to the state, the small hitting game state) with a predetermined probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. , Step S71 in FIG. 13), and it is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, which is disposed in the first start region, A first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area when the game medium is captured in one state; It is arranged in two starting areas and can be switched to either a first state where it is easy to capture the game medium or a second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium, and when the game medium is captured in the first state A second displacing member (for example, a second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting area is linked to the passage of the game medium to switch the first displacing member to the first state, and A first actuating mechanism (for example, a first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from a first state to a second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by a first displacement member, and in conjunction with the passage of the game media, A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches the two displacing members to the first state and switches the first displacing member to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media; ,Previous A passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a first area that is arranged in the first area and that makes it easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passage area The game medium has passed through the third displacement member (eg, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched to the second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and that is electrically operable, and the passage area. Drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, with the third state. Driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, the normal electric accessory solenoid 111), the first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first operation mechanism, and the second operation mechanism. Led to A distribution unit (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing to any one of the second passages, and at least one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Error detection can be performed based on a detection sensor (for example, photosensors 508 and 509) that can detect that the displacement member has operated and has reached an opening degree capable of capturing the game medium, and the detection result of the detection sensor. Error detecting means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S42 of FIG. 12), and the game state control means sets the game state after the end of the special game state to the first state of the third displacement member. A first specific state (for example, a first short time gaming state) in which it is highly likely that the distribution means guides the game medium captured while being switched to the first passage, and the third displacement portion. Is less likely to be guided to the first passage by the sorting means when the game medium is switched to the first state than the first specific state, and is highly likely to be guided to the second passage. Two specific states (for example, a second short time gaming state), and the probability that the drive determining means determines that the third displacement member is switched to the first state is lower than the first specific state and the second specific state. A state (for example, a normal game state) and a game state setting means (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S214 to S219 in FIG. 24) for setting any of the states are included.

  According to the above configuration, for example, the first displacing member (first non-electrically-powered object 415b) and the second displacing member (second non-electrically-powered object 415c) are in the first state even though the game is not being played. When there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed, such as when the blade members 510 and 512 are in an open state, an error signal is output from the detection sensor, so that the fraudulent act is prevented. It will be possible to deal quickly. In addition, for example, before the end of the time saving game state, the first displacement member or the second displacement member is set to the first state, and the state shifts to the normal game state after the time saving game state ends while maintaining the first state. Then, even if the game medium is inserted into the first displacement member or the second displacement member in the first state at an arbitrary timing in the normal game state, the error signal is output from the detection sensor, For example, by executing the notification effect, the player is forced to insert the game medium into the non-electric accessory early.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are switchable between an open state in which a game medium can be captured and a closed state in which a game medium cannot be captured (for example, Each of the blade sensors has a blade member 510, 512), and the detection sensor outputs a detection signal when the blade member has an opening degree of at least half the diameter of the game medium.

  According to the above configuration, for example, the blade members (blade members 510, 512) of the first displacement member (first non-electrically-powered object 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrically-powered object 415c) are forcibly opened. If an action is taken, an error signal is output before the vane member is fully opened. This makes it possible to promptly deal with fraudulent acts.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the special game state is a first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player, and a predetermined game value less than the first special game state. Including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) that can be given, is driven at least in the second special game state, it is easy to capture the game medium, and it is difficult to capture the game medium. A fourth displacing member (for example, an attacker 421) that can be switched to two states, and a game medium that is arranged in the first area and that is captured by the fourth displacing member pass by the game state control means. A special winning area (for example, a V winning opening 424) that serves as an opportunity to shift the state to the first special gaming state, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is The probability of the game medium passing through the second starting area being set as a chance is set to be higher than that when the game medium passing through the first starting area is used as the trigger, and the game state control means is configured to perform the special winning area. The game state after the end of the first special game state, which is executed upon the passage of the game medium, is the same as after the end of the first special game state, which is triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area. It is characterized by switching to.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine in which a fraudulent attempt to pry open the second displacement member is unlikely to occur particularly in a one-two-mixer.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory, which can prevent fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 6]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, there are a type called a digital pachi and a type called a blade mono. In the past, there was an era when the types of pachinko game machines were stipulated in the Customs and Business Law.

  In a pachinko game machine called a digital pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and this game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and the lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, stopping the display, and notifying the player by the stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, a three-digit doublet like “777”), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) should be given to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state where it is possible.

  Further, in a pachinko gaming machine called a wing mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area of the game board by the operation of the launching device by the player, and the launched game ball is provided in the game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the opened chucker, the blade member of the winning combination opens and the game ball can enter the winning combination. Then, when the blade member opens, the game ball placed on the blade member enters the prize winning object, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening in the prize winning object, the opening time of the blade member becomes long. As a result, the game ball in the prize winning object is shifted to the big hit game state where it is easy to enter the game ball. The player is provided with a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) in accordance with the game balls entering the winning combination.

  Further, in recent years, a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-type / 2-type mixing machine in which a digital pachi and a blade mono are mixed has appeared on the market. As a pachinko game machine of this type, one disclosed in Patent Document 1 has been conventionally proposed. According to Patent Document 1, as a result of the random number lottery triggered by the first starting mouth prize and the second starting mouth prize, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (so-called big jackpot), and the second starting mouth prize is a trigger. As a result of the random number lottery, it is determined that a small hit is made, and the small hit game state is entered, and in the small hit game state, when the game ball mounted on the blade member is won at the V winning opening in the winning a prize (so-called). 2 type jackpot), and a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, a first starting opening (so-called belly button) is arranged in the lower center of the board surface, and an electric accessory called an electric tulip is arranged directly below the opening. The second starting port is arranged immediately below. Furthermore, a winning combination having a V winning opening and a passage gate having a ball passage detecting sensor are arranged in the right side area of the board. The second starting opening winning is possible only through the electric tulip, and the opening of the electric tulip is conditional on the game ball passing through the passage gate. Therefore, in order to win the second start opening, the so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is hit in the right side area of the board surface.

  Therefore, first, the player hits the game ball into the left side area of the board, so-called left hitting, aiming for the first starting mouth winning. If the big hit is won with the first start mouth winning as a trigger, there is a case where after the big hit game state ends, the electric tulip can be shifted to the short time game state in which it is easy to open. In the time saving game state, the player opens the electric tulip by right-handing, and aims for the second starting mouth winning. If a small hit is won with the second starting opening winning combination as a trigger, the game ball may win the V winning opening and become a big hit. If the player wins the V winning opening and becomes a big hit, and then shifts to the time saving playing state again after the big hitting game state ends, there is a possibility that the V winning hole is won and a big hit occurs. In this way, by repeating the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the player may get more prize balls.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional digital patch, when the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is transitioned to after the jackpot game state is over (when the high probability state is not transitioned), for example, until the number of times the identification symbol varies 100 times. It is common to use an electric tulip that facilitates opening, that is, a type that employs a so-called electric Chu support.
However, in the pachinko game machine of the type 1 and type 2 mixture described above, an accessory such as an electric tulip that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is not arranged. For this reason, in the above-mentioned one-two-mix pachinko gaming machine, there is no choice but to shift to the normal gaming state when shifting to the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Since transitioning to the normal game state for the player after the jackpot gaming state ends significantly reduces the player's willingness to continue the game, the game is often finished when the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, the player may feel that the game is unsatisfactory because there is no electronic Chu support that is often used in conventional digital patches.

  Regarding this problem, it is possible to arrange an accessory such as an electric tulip with respect to the first starting port. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a drive device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a drive device for an electric tulip. However, the increase in the number of electric solenoids not only increases the cost, but also requires a mechanism for discharging the heat generated from the electric solenoids. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

  Therefore, as an accessory to be placed at the first starting opening or the second starting opening, instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of a game ball, a so-called non-electric accessory called a mechachu. It is possible to adopt.

  However, the adoption of the mechanism may be a target of a fraudulent act in which a tulip blade member is forcibly released from the outside by using a special device to facilitate the entry of a game ball.

  It is an object of the present invention to solve the above problems and provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory that can prevent fraud.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention includes a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, a first area (a right-handed area) and a second area (which are different from each other) included in the game area. A launching means (eg, launching device 20) capable of launching a game medium (eg, a game ball) to the game area while adjusting the launch strength of the game medium so that the game medium is divided into left-handed areas). ) And a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass, and a second starting area which is arranged in the first area and through which a game medium can pass. (For example, the second starting port 414c), and the special game capable of giving a predetermined game value to the player triggered by either the passage of the game medium in the first starting region or the passage of the game medium in the second starting region. State (for example, jackpot game Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S80 of FIG. 14, step S323, S329 of FIG. 36) that determines whether or not to shift to the state, the small hitting game state) with a predetermined probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means. Identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying by changing and stopping the identification information, and a game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that switches the game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means. , Step S71 in FIG. 13), and it is possible to switch between a first state in which the game medium is easily captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, which is disposed in the first start region, A first displacement member (for example, a first non-electric accessory 415b) that guides the game medium to the first starting area when the game medium is captured in one state; It is arranged in two starting areas and can be switched to either a first state where it is easy to capture the game medium or a second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium, and when the game medium is captured in the first state A second displacing member (for example, a second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting area is linked to the passage of the game medium to switch the first displacing member to the first state, and A first actuating mechanism (for example, a first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from a first state to a second state by capturing a predetermined number of game media by a first displacement member, and in conjunction with the passage of the game media, A second actuating mechanism (for example, a second actuating mechanism 513) that switches the two displacing members to the first state and switches the first displacing member to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media; ,Previous A passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged in the first area and through which the game medium can pass, and a first area that is arranged in the first area and that makes it easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passage area The game medium has passed through the third displacement member (eg, the ordinary electric accessory 415a) that can be switched to the second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium and that is electrically operable, and the passage area. Drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to switch the third displacement member in the second state to the first state, with the third state. Driving means for switching the displacement member to the first state (for example, the normal electric accessory solenoid 111), the first passage for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first operation mechanism, and the second operation mechanism. Led to A distribution unit (for example, a distribution device 506) for distributing to any one of the second passages, and at least one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member or the second displacement member. An opening detection sensor (for example, photosensors 508 and 509) capable of detecting that the displacement member operates to reach an opening degree capable of capturing the game medium, and detects that the game medium has passed the first starting area. A first passage detection sensor (for example, a first starting opening winning ball sensor 116b) and a second passage detecting sensor (for example, a second starting opening winning ball sensor) that detects that the game medium has passed through the second starting area. 116c), and an error detection means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S42 in FIG. 12) capable of executing error detection based on the detection result of the open detection sensor. The game state control means, the game state after the end of the special game state, the game medium captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state, the distribution means to the first passage A first specific state that is highly likely to be guided (for example, a first short time game state), and the game medium captured when the third displacement member is switched to the first state, the distribution unit uses the first passage. A second specific state (for example, a second short time gaming state) that is less likely to be guided to the first specific state and more likely to be guided to the second passage, and the first specific state and the second specific state Game state setting means (for example, a main state) that is set to any one of a normal state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deciding to switch the third displacement member to the first state by the drive determination means is lower than that. CPU 101, FIG. 4 in steps S214 to S219), the error detection means causes the drive determination means to determine the third displacement member when the opening detection sensor detects that the opening degree allows the game medium to be captured. Is determined to be driven, it is determined whether or not the game medium captured by the third displacement member is detected by the third displacement member detection sensor, an error is detected in the case of a negative determination, and the release detection sensor is When it is detected that the opening degree at which the game medium cannot be captured changes from the opening degree at which the game medium can be captured, the passage of the game medium is detected by the corresponding first passage detecting sensor or the second passage detecting sensor. It is characterized by determining whether or not it has been performed, and detecting an error in the case of a negative determination (for example, the main CPU 101, step S294 in FIG. 33).

  According to the above configuration, the drive determination means determines to drive the third displacement member (normal electric accessory 415a) (normal symbol hit), and the third displacement member is in the first state (normal electric accessory release). Since the release detection sensor outputs a detection signal (non-electric accessory release) is always performed in this order, an error signal is output if the above items are not performed in this order. It This makes it possible to promptly deal with fraudulent acts. Further, when the first displacement member or the second displacement member is closed, the corresponding first passage detection sensor or the second passage detection sensor always detects the game medium. Therefore, if this is not the case, an error signal Is output. This makes it possible to promptly deal with fraudulent acts.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are switchable between an open state in which a game medium can be captured and a closed state in which a game medium cannot be captured (for example, Each of the blade sensors has a blade member 510, 512), and the detection sensor outputs a detection signal when the blade member has an opening degree of at least half the diameter of the game medium.

  According to the above configuration, for example, the blade members (blade members 510, 512) of the first displacement member (first non-electrically-powered object 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrically-powered object 415c) are forcibly opened. If an action is taken, an error signal is output before the vane member is fully opened. This makes it possible to promptly deal with fraudulent acts.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, when the open detection sensor does not output an off signal until a predetermined time elapses after the open detection sensor outputs an on signal, the game medium is placed in the first area. Is output (for example, the main CPU 101, steps S286 to S294 in FIG. 33).

  According to the above configuration, for example, before the end of the specific state (time saving game state), the first displacing member or the second displacing member is set to the first state (open state), and the specific state is maintained while maintaining the first open state. After that, the game state is entered. Then, even if the game medium is inserted into the first displacement member or the second displacement member in the open state at an arbitrary timing in this game state, an error signal is output, for example, the first The player is forced to enter the game medium into the first displacing member or the second displacing member earlier by causing the area to execute the effect of urging the game medium to be ejected.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the special game state is a first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player, and a predetermined game value less than the first special game state. Including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) that can be given, is driven at least in the second special game state, it is easy to capture the game medium, and it is difficult to capture the game medium. A fourth displacing member (for example, an attacker 421) that can be switched to two states, and a game medium that is arranged in the first area and that is captured by the fourth displacing member pass by the game state control means. A special winning area (for example, a V winning opening 424) that serves as an opportunity to shift the state to the first special gaming state, and the probability that the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means is The probability of the game medium passing through the second starting area being set as a chance is set to be higher than that when the game medium passing through the first starting area is used as the trigger, and the game state control means is configured to perform the special winning area. The game state after the end of the first special game state, which is executed upon the passage of the game medium, is the same as after the end of the first special game state, which is triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area. It is characterized by switching to.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine in which a fraudulent attempt to pry open the second displacement member is unlikely to occur particularly in a one-two-mixer.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that employs a non-electric accessory, which can prevent fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 7]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

  For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes an opening / closing area to allow a game ball to enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by a player operating a launching device, and the game ball enters a start opening provided in the game area. When the ball is played, random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, and the stop display is performed. The person is notified.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in a so-called digital pachinko machine, which is called a digital pachi, in the case of a transition to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends (when it does not transition to a high probability state), for example, an identification pattern It is common to make the electric tulip easy to open until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times, that is, a model that employs a so-called electric Chu support.

  Further, in recent years, there are many types of pachinko game machines in which two types of a first starting port and a second starting port are installed on a game board. In addition, the big hit that is triggered by the second starting mouth prize is more advantageous to the player than the big hit that is triggered by the first starting mouth prize, for example, because the number of rounds in the big hit game is large. I am raising.

  Here, it is conceivable to provide electric tulips at both the first starting opening and the second starting opening so that the electric tuo support can be received. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a drive device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a drive device for an electric tulip. If the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost will increase correspondingly, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoids is required. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

  Instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball, a non-electric accessory called a mechachu, is adopted as an accessory to be placed at the first starting opening or the second starting opening. It is possible to do it.

  However, adopting the mecha chu requires a mechanism to selectively open one of the mecha chus arranged in the first start opening and the second start opening when the normal symbol game is won. become. Specifically, the mechanism is opened in conjunction with an open blade member or a game ball passing through a predetermined area, and a closed blade member is opened, and closed when the game ball enters the open blade member. Since the actuating mechanism is provided, it is conceivable to provide a sorting mechanism that distributes the game ball to the actuating mechanism of the first starting opening and the case of sending the game ball to the actuating mechanism of the second starting opening. .. Here, it is conceivable to apply an electric solenoid as a drive source of the distribution mechanism, but as described above, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems, suppresses an increase in electric components, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention can shoot a game medium to the game area while adjusting a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which the game medium can roll and adjusting the emission strength of the game medium. A starting means (for example, the launching device 20), a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) that is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, and a game medium that is arranged in the game area. A predetermined starting game for the player is triggered by either a passing second starting area (for example, the second starting opening 414c), a game medium passing through the first starting area, or a game medium passing through the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, step S80 in FIG. 14) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a value can be added (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) Su (S323, S329), identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and a stop display mode of the identification information display means. The game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) for switching the game state and the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the game medium is difficult to be captured. It is possible to switch to either of the second states, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member that guides the game medium to the first starting region (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b). And, it is arranged in the second starting area and can be switched to either a first state where it is easy to capture the game medium or a second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium. When the game medium is captured by the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region, the first displacement member is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, a first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from a first state to a second state when the first displacement member captures a predetermined number of game media, and a game medium. A second actuation mechanism that switches the second displacing member to the first state and switches the first displacing state from the first state to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media ( For example, a second operation mechanism 513), a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) that is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, and arranged in the game area and protrudes from the board surface of the game board. Then, it is possible to switch between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium that has passed through the passage area and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium by drawing it into the board surface of the game board, and it is possible to operate electrically. Whether to switch the third displacing member in the second state to the first state is triggered by the third displacement member (for example, the normal electric accessory 415a) and the passage of the game medium through the passage area. Drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) determined by the probability of, and drive control means for performing control for switching the third displacement member to the first state based on the determination of the drive determination means ( For example, a main CPU 101) and a first path (eg, FIG. 63 (d) in which the game medium can be guided to one of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism in the first state. A second path (for example, an arrow in FIG. 63 (b)) capable of guiding the game medium to the other of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism in the second state. And the drive control means is set as the drive mode of the third displacement member such that the time to be in the first state is shorter than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the first path. The first drive mode (short open) and the second drive mode in which the time to be in the first state is set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the first path ( For example, it is set to either long open).

  According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short circuit open), the game medium is moved from the first state (open state) to the second state (closed) before being disengaged from the third displacement member. State), the game medium is conveyed to the retracted position by the third displacement member, the third displacement member is moved from that position, and one of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism (for example, the first operating mechanism) is moved. 511). Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacing member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the game medium passes through the third displacing member in the protruding state, and the other of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism (for example, the second operating mechanism). Move to the operating mechanism 513). Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, which of the first displacement member (first non-electrical accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrical accessory 415c) is set to the first state is switched depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase relatively expensive parts such as an electromagnetic solenoid as in the conventional case, and the cost can be suppressed accordingly. Moreover, since it is possible to switch the starting region that makes it easier for the game medium to pass, for example, when the game medium passes through the second starting region, the setting is more advantageous for the player than when passing through the first starting region. It is possible to improve the interest of the game easily by devising such as.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, the first passage (for example, the first passage 504) for guiding the game medium captured by the third displacement member to the first operation mechanism, and the third displacement member are captured. And a second passage (for example, a second passage 505) for guiding the game medium to the second actuation mechanism, and the third displacement member opens at least the inlet of the second passage in the first state. A slide member (for example, a flat plate member 520) that closes the inlet of the second passage and opens the inlet of the first passage in the second state, the third displacement member in the second drive mode The game medium captured by is directed to the entrance of the second passage (for example, the second passage entrance 505a) through the slide member, and the game medium captured by the third displacement member in the first drive mode is , It is drawn toward the game board together with the slide member, passes through the upper part of the entrance of the second passage in the closed state, and goes toward the entrance of the first passage (for example, the first passage entrance 504a). And

  According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short circuit open), the game medium is guided to the inlet of the first passage and moves to the first actuation mechanism through the first passage. To do. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the game medium is guided to the inlet of the second passage and moves to the second operation mechanism through the second passage. Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, the driving mode of the third displacement member is switched depending on which of the first displacement member (first non-electrical accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrical accessory 415c) is in the first state. It becomes feasible. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as electromagnetic solenoids in order to distribute the game media, which makes it possible to reduce the cost accordingly. Moreover, depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member, for example, the game medium is set to be more advantageous to the player when the game medium passes through the second starting region than when the game medium passes through the first starting region. It becomes easy to improve the interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the special game state is less than a first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player, and the first special game state. Including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) capable of giving a predetermined game value, driven in at least the second special game state, and a first state in which a game medium can be easily captured and a game medium capture The fourth displacement member (for example, the attacker 421) that can be switched to the second state where it is difficult to move, and the game state control which is arranged in the game area and through which the game medium captured by the fourth displacement member passes. The means further comprises a special winning area (for example, a V winning opening 424) that serves as an opportunity to shift the gaming state to the first special gaming state, and the lottery means determines the second special gaming state. The probability of being set is set to be higher when the game medium passing through the second starting area is used as an opportunity than when the game medium passing through the first starting area is used as an opportunity. Is a game state after the end of the first special game state executed by the passage of the game medium in the special winning area, the first special game triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area The feature is that switching is performed in the same manner as after the end of the state.

  According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the increase in the number of electric parts and improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix 8]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

  For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hit game, a blade member called an attacker changes its posture to an open posture that opens and closes an opening / closing area to allow a game ball to enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine that makes it possible. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area of a game board by a player operating a launching device, and the game ball enters a start opening provided in the game area. When the ball is played, random number lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. The lottery result is displayed by changing the display of the identification symbol, and the stop display is performed. The person is notified.

[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] JP2013-233375A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in a so-called digital pachinko machine, which is called a digital pachi, in the case of a transition to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot gaming state ends (when it does not transition to a high probability state), for example, an identification pattern It is common to make the electric tulip easy to open until the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times, that is, a model that employs a so-called electric Chu support.

  Further, in recent years, there are many types of pachinko game machines in which two types of a first starting port and a second starting port are installed on a game board. In addition, the big hit that is triggered by the second starting mouth prize is more advantageous to the player than the big hit that is triggered by the first starting mouth prize, for example, because the number of rounds in the big hit game is large. I am raising.

  Here, it is conceivable to provide electric tulips at both the first starting opening and the second starting opening so that the electric tuo support can be received. However, increasing the number of electric tulips requires a drive device for driving the blade members of the electric tulips. Generally, an electric solenoid is adopted as a drive device for an electric tulip. If the number of electric solenoids increases, not only the cost will increase correspondingly, but also a mechanism for releasing the heat generated from the electric solenoids is required. Therefore, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids as much as possible.

  Instead of the electric tulip, a tulip that mechanically opens and closes in conjunction with the rolling of the game ball, a non-electric accessory called a mechachu, is adopted as an accessory to be placed at the first starting opening or the second starting opening. It is possible to do it.

  However, adopting the mecha chu requires a mechanism to selectively open one of the mecha chus arranged in the first start opening and the second start opening when the normal symbol game is won. become. Specifically, the mechanism is opened in conjunction with an open blade member or a game ball passing through a predetermined area, and a closed blade member is opened, and closed when the game ball enters the open blade member. Since the actuating mechanism is provided, it is conceivable to provide a sorting mechanism that distributes the game ball to the actuating mechanism of the first starting opening and the case of sending the game ball to the actuating mechanism of the second starting opening. .. Here, it is conceivable to apply an electric solenoid as a drive source of the distribution mechanism, but as described above, it is desirable not to increase the number of electric solenoids.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems, suppresses an increase in electric components, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
The present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The game machine of the present invention can shoot a game medium to the game area while adjusting a game board (for example, a game board 40) having a game area in which the game medium can roll and adjusting the emission strength of the game medium. A starting means (for example, the launching device 20), a first starting area (for example, a first starting opening 414b) that is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, and a game medium that is arranged in the game area. A predetermined starting game for the player is triggered by either a passing second starting area (for example, the second starting opening 414c), a game medium passing through the first starting area, or a game medium passing through the second starting area. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101, step S80 in FIG. 14, step S80 in FIG. 14) that determines with a predetermined probability whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a value can be added (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) Su (S323, S329), identification information display means (for example, a special symbol display device 431) for notifying the lottery result of the lottery means by changing and stopping the identification information, and a stop display mode of the identification information display means. The game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S71 in FIG. 13) for switching the game state and the first state in which the game medium is easily captured and the game medium is difficult to be captured. It is possible to switch to either of the second states, and when the game medium is captured in the first state, the first displacement member that guides the game medium to the first starting region (for example, the first non-electric accessory 415b). And, it is arranged in the second starting area and can be switched to either a first state where it is easy to capture the game medium or a second state where it is difficult to capture the game medium. When the game medium is captured by the second displacement member (for example, the second non-electric accessory 415c) that guides the game medium to the second starting region, the first displacement member is interlocked with the passage of the game medium. A first actuating mechanism (for example, a first actuating mechanism 511) that switches from a first state to a second state when the first displacement member captures a predetermined number of game media, and a game medium. A second actuation mechanism that switches the second displacing member to the first state and switches the first displacing state from the first state to the second state by the second displacing member capturing a predetermined number of game media ( For example, a second actuating mechanism 513), a passage area (for example, a ball passage detector 416) which is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass, and arranged on the board surface of the game board in the game area. , A third state in which the game medium that has passed through the passage area can be switched between a first state in which the game medium can be captured and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and which is electrically operable (for example, Whether or not the third displacement member in the second state is switched to the first state is triggered by the passage of the game medium through the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 and the electric tulip 523) and the passage area with a predetermined probability. The drive determination means (for example, the main CPU 101, step S231 in FIG. 26) to be determined, and the drive control means (for example, the main CPU, which controls to switch the third displacement member to the first state based on the determination by the drive determination means). CPU 101), and the third displacement member is capable of guiding the game medium to one of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism in the first state. A second path (which forms a first path (arrow in FIG. 64 (d)) and can guide the game medium to the other of the first operation mechanism and the second operation mechanism in the second state ( 64 (c) (arrow), the drive control means is required for the captured game medium to pass through the game board during the time when the third displacement member is driven into the first state. The first drive mode (short circuit open) set to be shorter than the minimum time and the time to be in the first state are set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time required for the captured game medium to pass through the game board. The second drive mode (for example, long open) is set.

  According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short open), the game medium captured by the third displacement member does not move to the game board side and the game medium is on the game board. Remains, and moves to one of the first operating mechanism and the second operating mechanism (for example, the first operating mechanism 511) through the first path. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the third displacement member passes through the base end portions of the pair of blade members and the other of the first operation mechanism and the second operation mechanism (for example, Move to the second actuation mechanism 513). Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, which of the first displacement member (first non-electrical accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrical accessory 415c) is set to the first state is switched depending on the driving mode of the third displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase relatively expensive parts such as an electromagnetic solenoid as in the conventional case, and the cost can be suppressed accordingly. Moreover, since it is possible to switch the starting area that makes it easier for the game medium to pass through, for example, the setting is more advantageous for the player when the game medium passes through the second starting area than when passing through the first starting area. It is possible to improve the interest of the game easily by devising such as.

  Further, in the game machine of the present invention, in the above configuration, a first passage (for example, a first passage 504) that guides the game medium that has passed through the first path to the first operation mechanism, and a second passage that has passed through the second path. A third passage (for example, a second passage 505) for guiding the game medium captured by the three displacement members to the second operation mechanism is further provided, and the third displacement member rotates along the board surface of the game board. A pair of blade members (blade members 524, 524) that are arranged so as to be capable of forming the first state when the tip portions are separated from each other and that form the second state when the tip portions approach each other; Each of the pair of blade members has a guide member (for example, guide plates 524a, 524a) extending toward the game board at a base end portion thereof, and the guide members integrally form the game medium in the first state. The back of the game board A guide path that guides the second passage disposed in the second state, and a path through which the game medium can fall is formed between the base end portions of the pair of blade members that are separated from each other in the second state. The first path is a path in which the game medium riding on the pair of blade members in the first state passes through the guide path and goes to the entrance of the second path (for example, the second path entrance 505a). In the second path, the game medium riding on the pair of blade members immediately before changing from the first state to the second state falls between the base end portions of the pair of blade members, and the dropped game medium Is guided to the first passage.

  According to the above configuration, when the third displacement member is driven in the first drive mode (short circuit open), the game medium captured by the pair of blade members (blade members 524, 524) is the same as that of the pair of blade members. It passes between the base end portions, is guided to the inlet of the first passage through the second passage, and moves to the first actuating mechanism through the first passage. Therefore, the first displacement member (first non-electric accessory 415b) is in the first state (open state). When the third displacement member is driven in the second drive mode (long open), the game medium captured by the pair of blade members (blade members 524, 524) is a guide member (for example, guide plates 524a, 524a). Is guided to the inlet of the second passage (for example, the second passage entrance 505a) through the guide passage formed by, and moves to the second actuation mechanism through the second passage. Therefore, the second displacement member (second non-electric accessory 415c) is in the first state (open state). In this way, which of the first displacement member (first non-electrical accessory 415b) and the second displacement member (second non-electrical accessory 415c) is in the first state is the first driving mode of the third displacement member. This makes it possible to switch between them, and it is not necessary to increase the number of relatively expensive parts such as an electromagnetic solenoid as in the conventional case, and the cost can be suppressed accordingly.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, in the above-mentioned configuration, the special game state is less than a first special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player, and the first special game state. Including a second special game state (for example, a small hit game state) capable of giving a predetermined game value, driven in at least the second special game state, and a first state in which a game medium can be easily captured and a game medium capture The fourth displacement member (for example, the attacker 421) that can be switched to the second state where it is difficult to move, and the game state control which is arranged in the game area and through which the game medium captured by the fourth displacement member passes. The means further comprises a special winning area (for example, a V winning opening 424) that triggers the game state to shift to the first special gaming state, and the second special gaming state is determined by the lottery means. The probability of being set is set to be higher when the game medium passing through the second starting area is used as an opportunity than when the game medium passing through the first starting area is used as an opportunity. Is a game state after the end of the first special game state executed by the passage of the game medium in the special winning area, the first special game triggered by the entry of the game medium into the second starting area The feature is that switching is performed in the same manner as after the state ends.

  According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game in a pachinko gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the increase in the number of electric parts and improving the enjoyment of the game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 20 launching device 40 gaming board 41 gaming area 50 liquid crystal display device 70 payout unit 71 payout device 100 main control circuit 101 main CPU
103 main RAM
111 Ordinary electric accessory solenoid 112 Big winning opening solenoid 113 Count sensor 114d General winning ball sensor 115 Ball passing detection sensor 116a Central starting opening winning ball sensor 116b First starting opening winning ball sensor 116c Second starting opening winning ball sensor 117 Winning opening Solenoid 118 Open / close prize hole solenoid 119 V prize ball sensor 120 Open / close prize hole count sensor 121 Sorting solenoid 122 Ordinary electric accessory ball sensor 200 Sub control circuit 201 Sub CPU
202 Program ROM
203 Work RAM
210 Display control circuit 300 Discharge / launch control circuit 413 Central base plate 414a Central starting opening 414b First starting opening 414c Second starting opening 415a Normal electric role 415b First non-electric role 415c Second non-electric role 416 Ball passing Detector 417 Shutter 418 Big prize hole 419a, 419b, 419c General prize hole 420 Open / close prize hole 421 Attacker 422 V prize device 424 V prize hole 426 Movable member 431 Special symbol display device 433 Special symbol hold display device 434 Ordinary symbol display device 435 Ordinary symbol hold display device 450 touch sensor 500 guideway 504 first passage 504a first passage entrance 505 second passage 505a second passage entrance 506 distribution device 507 distribution plate 511 first actuation mechanism 512 blade member 513 Second operating mechanism 520 Flat plate member

Claims (2)

A first variable winning device, in which a first displacing member capable of converting a game ball into a first state in which winning is difficult and a second state in which winning is easy is provided,
A second variable prize device provided with a second displacement member capable of converting the game ball into a first state in which it is difficult to win and a second state in which it is easy to win.
A first starting area provided in the first variable winning device,
A second starting area provided in the second variable winning device,
A game state control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
A first variable display game control means capable of executing a first variable display game based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first starting area;
Second variation display game control means capable of executing a second variation display game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second starting area,
Production control means for controlling production execution means for executing production,
In a gaming machine provided with a detection means for detecting a player's operation,
The game state control means,
Normal gaming state,
A first specific game state in which the first displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than in the normal game state,
It is possible to control to any one of a normal game state and a second specific game state in which the second displacement member is more likely to be in the second state than the first specific game state,
The effect control means includes suggestive effect execution means capable of executing an suggestive effect that suggests that the second displacement member is in the second state,
The suggestive effect execution means,
The suggestion effect can be executed in the first specific game state or the second specific game state,
When the suggestive effect is executed in the second specific game state, the suggestive effect is switched to one of the suggestive effect execution state and the suggestive effect non-execution state in which the suggestive effect is not executed. Is feasible,
While the suggestion effect non-execution state, it is possible to execute the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation to the detection means, while not performing the operation promotion effect in the suggestion effect execution state, the game characterized by Machine. A third variable winning device, in which a third displacing member capable of converting the game ball into a first state in which winning is difficult and a second state in which winning is easy is provided,
A specific area provided in the third variable winning device,
When the first variable display game or the second variable display game has a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state advantageous to the player.
When the second variable display game has a predetermined result, by setting the third displacement member to the second state, a predetermined game state in which a game ball can be easily won in the specific area is generated. It is possible to
The specific area can generate the special game state based on the passage of a game ball,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state,
The special game state generated based on the passage to the specific area is shifted to the second special game state rather than the special game state generated based on the first variable display game having the special result. High proportion,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: